Motorola MOTOTRBO XPR 7550 User guide

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO
MOTOTRBO™
XPR™ 7550/XPR 7580
COLOR DISPLAY PORTABLE
USER GUIDE
Declaration of Conformity....................... 14
Important Safety Information........16
Software Version............................17
Computer Software Copyrights....18
Handling Precautions.................... 19
Getting Started............................... 20
How to Use This Guide..................................20
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You.............................................20
Preparing Your Radio for Use.......22
Charging the Battery......................................22
Attaching the Battery..................................... 22
Attaching the Antenna................................... 23
Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 23
Attaching the Universal Connector Cover
(Dust Cover)............................................. 24
Powering Up the Radio..................................24
Adjusting the Volume.....................................25
Contents
Contents
Identifying Radio Controls............ 26
Radio Controls............................................... 26
Using the 4–Way Navigation Button.............. 27
Using the Keypad.......................................... 28
Non-Connect Plus Operations......30
Additional Radio Controls
in Non-Connect Plus
Mode.................................... 31
English
1
Contents
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................31
Programmable Buttons....................... 31
Assignable Radio Functions.....32
Assignable Settings or Utility
Functions............................ 34
Accessing the Programmed
Functions....................................... 35
Identifying Status Indicators................35
Display Icons............................35
Call Icons................................. 38
Advanced Menu Icons..............39
Mini Notice Icons......................39
Sent Item Icons ....................39
Bluetooth Device Icons............ 40
Job Tickets Icons..................... 40
LED Indicator........................... 40
Audio Tones............................. 42
Indicator Tones........................ 42
Switching Between Conventional
Analog and Digital Mode................43
IP Site Connect ...............................43
Capacity Plus ..................................44
Linked Capacity Plus ...................... 44
2
English
Making and Receiving Calls
in Non-Connect Plus
Mode.................................... 46
Selecting a Zone................................. 46
Selecting a Channel............................47
Receiving and Responding to a
Radio Call...................................... 47
Receiving and Responding
to a Group Call.................... 48
Receiving and Responding
to a Private Call .............. 48
Receiving an All Call ............... 49
Receiving and Responding
to a Selective Call ........... 50
Receiving and Responding
to a Phone Call ............... 50
Making a Radio Call............................52
Making a Group Call................ 52
Making a Private Call ........... 53
Making an All Call ................... 54
Making a Selective Call ....... 55
Advanced Features in NonConnect Plus Mode............ 66
Radio Check....................................... 66
Sending a Radio Check........... 66
Remote Monitor.................................. 68
Initiating Remote Monitor......... 68
Stopping Remote Monitor........ 69
Scan Lists........................................... 70
Viewing an Entry in the
Scan List............................. 70
Viewing an Entry in the
Scan List by Alias Search... 71
Editing the Scan List................ 71
Scan....................................................75
Starting and Stopping Scan..... 76
Responding to a
Transmission During a
Scan.................................... 76
Deleting a Nuisance Channel...77
Restoring a Nuisance
Channel...............................77
Vote Scan ....................................... 77
Contact Settings..................................78
Making a Group Call from
Contacts.............................. 78
Making a Private Call from
Contacts ..........................79
Making a Phone Call from
Contacts.............................. 80
Contents
Making a Phone Call with
the One Touch Access
Button..................................56
Making a Private Call with a
One Touch Call Button........57
Making a Group, Private or
All Call with the
Programmable Number
Key ..................................58
Making a Phone Call with
the Programmable
Phone Button .................. 59
Making a Call with the
Programmable Manual
Dial Button ...................... 61
Stopping a Radio Call .....................63
Talkaround.......................................... 64
Monitoring Features............................ 65
Monitoring a Channel............... 65
Permanent Monitor...................65
3
English
Contents
Making a Call Alias Search
.........................................83
Making a Group, Private,
Phone or All Call by Alias
Search ................................84
Assigning an Entry to a
Programmable Number
Key ..................................85
Removing the Association
between Entry and
Programmable Number
Key ..................................86
Adding a New Contact............. 87
Setting a Default Contact .....88
Call Indicator Settings......................... 88
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Call Alert
.........................................88
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Private
Calls ................................89
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Selective
Call ..................................90
4
English
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Text
Message............................. 90
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for
Telemetry Status with
Text..................................... 91
Assigning Ring Styles.............. 92
Escalating Alarm Tone
Volume................................ 92
Call Log Features................................92
Viewing Recent Calls............... 92
Storing an Alias from a Call
List...................................... 93
Deleting a Call from a Call
List...................................... 93
Viewing Details from a Call
List...................................... 94
Call Alert Operation.............................94
Receiving and Responding
to a Call Alert...................... 94
Making a Call Alert from the
Contact List......................... 95
Making a Call Alert with the
One Touch Access
Button..................................96
Emergency Operation......................... 96
Editing 5–Tone Status
Details............................... 104
Text Message Features ................... 104
Writing and Sending a Text
Message........................... 104
Sending a Quick Text
Message with the One
Touch Access Button........ 106
Accessing the Drafts Folder... 106
Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages..........................108
Managing Sent Text
Messages..........................110
Receiving a Text Message.....114
Managing Received Text
Messages..........................114
Job Tickets........................................118
Accessing the Job Ticket
Folder................................ 118
Logging In and Out of the
Remote Server.................. 119
Creating and Sending a Job
Ticket................................ 120
Responding to the Job Ticket.121
Deleting a Job Ticket..............121
Privacy ..........................................122
English
Contents
Receiving an Emergency
Alarm...................................97
Responding to an
Emergency Alarm............... 97
Sending an Emergency
Alarm...................................98
Sending an Emergency
Alarm with Call.................... 99
Sending an Emergency
Alarm with Voice to
Follow ........................... 100
Reinitiating an Emergency
Mode................................. 101
Exiting Emergency Mode
After Sending the
Emergency Alarm............. 101
Analog Message Encode ..............102
Sending MDC Message
Encode to Dispatcher........102
Sending 5–Tone Message
Encode to Contact............ 102
Analog Status Update ...................103
Sending Status Update to
Predefined Contact........... 103
Viewing a 5-Tone Status
Details............................... 103
5
Contents
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 124
Multi-Site Controls ........................ 124
Starting an Automatic Site
Search...............................124
Stopping an Automatic Site
Search...............................125
Starting a Manual Site
Search...............................126
Security............................................. 127
Radio Disable.........................127
Radio Enable..........................128
Lone Worker..................................... 130
Password Lock Features.................. 130
Accessing the Radio from
Password.......................... 130
Unlocking the Radio from
Locked State..................... 131
Turning the Password Lock
On or Off........................... 132
Changing the Password......... 132
Bluetooth Operation.......................... 133
Turning Bluetooth On and
Off..................................... 134
Finding and Connecting to a
Bluetooth Device............... 134
6
English
Finding and Connecting
from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode)......... 135
Disconnecting from a
Bluetooth Device............... 136
Switching Audio Route
between Internal Radio
Speaker and Bluetooth
Device............................... 136
Viewing Device Details...........137
Editing Device Name..............137
Deleting Device Name........... 137
Bluetooth Mic Gain.................138
Permanent Bluetooth
Discoverable Mode........... 138
Notification List..................................139
Accessing the Notification
List.................................... 139
Auto-Range Transponder System
(ARTS) .....................................139
Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 140
Utilities.............................................. 140
Locking and Unlocking the
Keypad.............................. 140
Turning Keypad Tones On
or Off................................. 141
Turning the LED Indicator
On or Off........................... 151
Turning the Introduction
Screen On or Off............... 151
Turning the Voice
Announcement On or Off.. 152
Setting the Text-to-Speech
Feature..............................153
Call Forwarding ..................154
Menu Timer............................ 155
Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGCA)...................................... 155
Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGCD)...................................... 156
Switching Audio Route
between Internal Radio
Speaker and Wired
Accessory......................... 156
Intelligent Audio......................157
Turning the Acoustic
Feedback Suppressor
Feature On or Off ..........158
Turning the Microphone
Dynamic Distortion
Control Feature On or Off. 159
Contents
Setting the Squelch Level...... 141
Setting the Power Level......... 142
Turning the Option Board
Feature(s) On or Off..........143
Identifying Cable Type........... 143
Turning the Voice Operating
Transmission (VOX)
Feature On or Off.............. 143
Setting the Display Backlight
Timer................................. 144
Turning the Backlight Auto
On or Off........................... 145
Turning the Radio Tones/
Alerts On or Off................. 145
Setting the Tone Alert
Volume Offset Level..........146
Turning the Talk Permit
Tone On or Off.................. 147
Turning the Power Up Alert
Tone On or Off.................. 147
Setting the Text Message
Alert Tone......................... 148
Changing the Display Mode... 149
Adjusting the Display
Brightness......................... 149
Language............................... 150
7
English
Turning Trill Enhancement
On or Off........................... 160
Setting the Audio Ambience...160
Setting the Audio Profiles.......161
Turning the Global
Positioning System
(GPS) On or Off................ 161
Text Entry Configuration........ 162
Flexible Receive List.............. 167
Accessing General Radio
Information........................ 170
Front Panel Configuration
(FPC)................................ 174
Checking the RSSI Values.....174
Connect Plus Operations............ 175
Contents
Additional Radio Controls
in Connect Plus Mode...... 176
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............176
Programmable Buttons..................... 176
Assignable Radio Functions...176
Assignable Settings or Utility
Functions.......................... 178
8
English
Identifying Status Indicators in
Connect Plus Mode..................... 179
Display Icons..........................179
Call Icons............................... 180
Advanced Menu Icons............181
Sent Item Icons ..................... 181
Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 182
LED Indicator......................... 182
Indicator Tones...................... 183
Audio Tones........................... 183
Switching Between Connect Plus
and Non-Connect Plus Modes..... 184
Making and Receiving Calls
in Connect Plus Mode...... 185
Selecting a Site................................. 185
Roam Request....................... 185
Site Lock On/Off.....................185
Site Restriction....................... 185
Selecting a Zone............................... 186
Using Multiple Networks................... 186
Selecting a Call Type........................ 187
Receiving and Responding to a
Radio Call.................................... 187
Making an Outbound Private
Phone Call from Contacts. 196
Waiting for the Channel
Grant in an Outbound
Private Phone Call............ 197
Making a Buffered Over-Dial
in a Connected
Outbound Private Phone
Call.................................... 198
Making a Live Over-Dial in a
Connected Outbound
Private Phone Call............ 198
Contents
Receiving and Responding
to a Group Call.................. 188
Receiving and Responding
to a Private Call.................188
Receiving a Site All Call......... 189
Receiving an Inbound
Private Phone Call............ 189
Receiving an Inbound
Phone Talkgroup Call....... 190
Inbound Phone Multi-Group
Call.................................... 191
Making a Radio Call..........................191
Making a Call with the
Channel Selector Knob..... 191
Making a Private Call with a
One Touch Call Button......194
Making a Call with the
Programmable Manual
Dial Button........................ 194
Making an Outbound Private
Phone Call with the
Programmable Manual
Dial Button........................ 195
Making an Outbound Private
Phone Call via the Phone
Menu................................. 195
Advanced Features in
Connect Plus Mode.......... 200
Auto Fallback.................................... 200
Indications of Auto Fallback
Mode................................. 200
Making/Receiving Calls in
Fallback Mode...................200
Returning to Normal
Operation.......................... 201
Radio Check..................................... 201
Sending a Radio Check......... 201
Remote Monitor................................ 202
English
9
Contents
10
English
Initiating Remote Monitor....... 203
Scan..................................................204
Starting and Stopping Scan... 204
Responding to a
Transmission During a
Scan.................................. 204
User Configurable Scan....................205
Turning Scan On or Off.....................205
Editing the Scan List......................... 206
Add or Delete a Group via the Add
Members Menu............................ 207
Understanding Scan Operation.........209
Scan Talkback.................................. 209
Contacts Settings..............................210
Making a Private Call from
Contacts............................ 211
Making a Call Alias Search.... 212
Adding a New Contact........... 212
Call Indicator Settings....................... 213
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Call Alert .213
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Private
Calls.................................. 213
Activating and Deactivating
Call Ringers for Text
Message........................... 214
Escalating Alarm Tone
Volume.............................. 214
Call Log Features..............................215
Viewing Recent Calls............. 215
Deleting a Call from a Call
List.................................... 215
Viewing Details from a Call
List.................................... 216
Call Alert Operation...........................216
Receiving and Responding
to a Call Alert.................... 216
Making a Call Alert from the
Contact List....................... 217
Making a Call Alert with the
One Touch Access
Button................................218
Emergency Operation....................... 218
Receiving an Incoming
Emergency........................ 219
Saving the Emergency
Details to the Alarm List.... 220
Deleting the Emergency
Details............................... 220
Responding to an
Emergency Call.................221
Responding to an
Emergency Alert............... 221
Reading a Text Message....... 239
Managing Received Text
Messages..........................239
Privacy.............................................. 242
Making a Privacy-Enabled
(Scrambled) Call............... 244
Security............................................. 244
Radio Disable.........................244
Radio Enable..........................245
Password Lock Features.................. 247
Accessing the Radio from
Password.......................... 247
Turning the Password Lock
On or Off........................... 248
Unlocking the Radio from
Locked State..................... 248
Changing the Password......... 248
Bluetooth Operation.......................... 249
Turning Bluetooth On and
Off..................................... 250
Finding and Connecting to a
Bluetooth Device............... 251
Finding and Connecting
from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode)......... 252
Disconnecting from a
Bluetooth Device............... 252
Contents
Initiating an Emergency Call.. 222
Initiating an Emergency Call
with Voice to Follow.......... 222
Initiating an Emergency Alert. 223
Exiting Emergency Mode....... 223
Man Down Alarms.............................224
Turning Man Down Alarms
On and Off........................ 225
Resetting the Man Down
Alarms............................... 226
Beacon Feature................................ 227
Turning Beacon On and Off... 227
Resetting the Beacon.............228
Text Message Features.................... 229
Writing and Sending a Text
Message........................... 229
Sending a Quick Text
Message........................... 230
Sending a Quick Text
Message with the One
Touch Access Button........ 231
Accessing the Drafts Folder... 231
Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages..........................233
Managing Sent Text
Messages..........................235
Receiving a Text Message.....239
11
English
Contents
12
English
Switching Audio Route
between Internal Radio
Speaker and Bluetooth
Device............................... 253
Viewing Device Details...........253
Editing Device Name..............253
Deleting Device Name........... 254
Bluetooth Mic Gain.................254
Permanent Bluetooth
Discoverable Mode........... 255
Notification List..................................255
Accessing the Notification
List.................................... 255
Utilities.............................................. 255
Turning the Radio Tones/
Alerts On or Off................. 255
Turning Keypad Tones On
or Off................................. 256
Setting the Tone Alert
Volume Offset Level..........257
Turning the Talk Permit
Tone On or Off.................. 257
Turning the Power Up Alert
Tone On or Off.................. 258
Setting the Power Level......... 258
Changing the Display Mode... 259
Adjusting the Display
Brightness......................... 260
Setting the Display Backlight
Timer................................. 260
Turning the Introduction
Screen On or Off............... 261
Locking and Unlocking the
Keypad.............................. 261
Language............................... 262
Turning the LED Indicator
On or Off........................... 263
Identifying Cable Type........... 263
Voice Announcement............. 263
Menu Timer............................ 264
Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGCD)...................................... 265
Intelligent Audio......................265
Turning the Acoustic
Feedback Suppressor
Feature On or Off.............. 267
Turning the Microphone
Dynamic Distortion
Control Feature On or Off. 267
Turning the Global
Positioning System
(GPS) On or Off................ 268
Text Entry Configuration........ 268
Technical Parameters for Interfacing
External Data Sources............................295
Contents
Accessing General Radio
Information........................ 274
Batteries and Chargers Warranty......... 296
Accessories..................................286
The Workmanship Warranty........................ 296
The Capacity Warranty................................ 296
Limited Warranty....................................297
Authorized Accessories
List..................................... 287
Antennas...........................................287
Batteries............................................287
Carry Devices................................... 288
Chargers........................................... 288
Earbuds and Earpieces.....................288
Headsets and Headset Accessories. 289
Remote Speaker Microphones......... 289
Surveillance Accessories.................. 290
Miscellaneous Accessories...............291
MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION
PRODUCTS........................................... 297
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS
AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 297
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 298
III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................298
IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.298
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT
COVER:..................................................299
VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE
PROVISIONS:........................................ 299
VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................301
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Frequency Range...............................292
Special Channel Assignments..................... 292
Emergency Channel......................... 292
Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 292
Operating Frequency Requirements............292
Declaration of Compliance for the Use of
Distress and Safety Frequencies............295
13
English
Declaration of Conformity
This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.
Declaration of Conformity
Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)
Declaration of Conformity
Responsible Party
Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.
Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744
Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: XPR 7550/XPR 7580
conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)
14
English
Declaration of Conformity
Class B Digital Device
As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
•
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
15
English
Important Safety Information
RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide
for Portable Two-Way Radios
ATTENTION!
Important Safety Information
This radio is restricted to Occupational use only.
Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure
and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way
Radios which contains important operating
instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness
and control for Compliance with applicable standards
and Regulations.
For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries,
and other accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com
Any modification to this device, not expressly
authorized by Motorola, may void the user’s authority
to operate this device.
16
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio
transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a
type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the
transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential
radio interference to other users, the antenna type
English
and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent
isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than
that necessary for successful communication.
This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry
Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna
with the maximum permissible gain and required
antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated.
Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain
greater than the maximum gain indicated for that
type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Software Version
Software Version
All the features described in the following sections are
supported by the radio's software version R02.40.00
or later.
See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version on page 172 to determine your radio's
software version.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more details of all the features supported.
17
English
Computer Software Copyrights
Computer Software Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this manual may
include copyrighted Motorola computer programs
stored in semiconductor memories or other media.
Laws in the United States and other countries
preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for
copyrighted computer programs including, but not
limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in
any form the copyrighted computer program.
Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer
programs contained in the Motorola products
described in this manual may not be copied,
reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or
distributed in any manner without the express written
permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either
directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola, except for the normal nonexclusive license to use that arises by operation of
law in the sale of a product.
The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied in
this product is protected by intellectual property rights
18
English
including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets
of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for
use within this Communications Equipment. The user
of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from
attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or
disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way
convert the Object Code into a human-readable form.
U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.
The MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meets
IP57 specifications, allowing the radio to withstand
adverse field conditions such as being submersed in
water.
•
•
•
•
If the radio has been submersed in water, shake
the radio well to remove any water that may be
trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone
port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio
performance.
If the radio’s battery contact area has been
exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts
on both the radio and the battery before attaching
the battery to the radio. The residual water could
short-circuit the radio.
If the radio has been submersed in a corrosive
substance (e.g. saltwater), rinse the radio and
battery in fresh water then dry the radio and
battery.
To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use a
diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and
fresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to one
gallon of water).
•
•
•
•
•
Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio
chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows
for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so
may create a leak path into the radio and the
radio’s submersibility may be lost.
Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a
label.
Ensure that no oily substances come in contact
with the vent.
The radio with antenna attached properly is
designed to be submersible to a maximum depth
of 1 meter (3.28 feet) and a maximum submersion
time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum
limit or use without antenna may result in damage
to the radio.
When cleaning the radio, do not use a high
pressure jet spray on the radio as this will exceed
the 1 meter depth pressure and may cause water
to leak into the radio.
Caution: Do not disassemble the radio. This
could damage radio seals and result in leak
paths into the radio. Radio maintenance
should only be done in service depot that is
equipped to test and replace the seal on the
radio.
Handling Precautions
Handling Precautions
19
English
Getting Started
How to Use This Guide
This User Guide covers the basic operation of the
MOTOTRBO Portables.
However, your dealer or system administrator may
have customized your radio for your specific needs.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
Throughout this publication, the icons described next
are used to indicate features supported in either the
conventional Analog mode or conventional Digital
mode:
Getting Started
Indicates a conventional Analog ModeOnly feature.
Indicates a conventional Digital ModeOnly feature.
Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are not
available in Connect Plus mode of operation. See
Connect Plus Operations on page 175 for more
information.
For features that are available in a conventional multisite mode, see IP Site Connect on page 43 for more
information.
Selected features are also available on the single-site
trunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on
page 44 for more information.
Selected features are also available in the multi-site
trunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See Linked
Capacity Plus on page 44 for more information.
What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can
Tell You
You can consult your dealer or system administrator
about the following:
•
•
20
For features that are available in both conventional
Analog and Digital modes, no icon is shown.
English
•
Is your radio programmed with any preset
conventional channels?
Which buttons have been programmed to access
other features?
What optional accessories may suit your needs?
•
What are the best radio usage practices for
effective communication?
What maintenance procedures will help promote
longer radio life?
Getting Started
•
21
English
Preparing Your Radio for Use
Charging the Battery
Preparing Your Radio for Use
For best performance, your radio is powered by a
Motorola-approved Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) or
Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage and to
ensure compliance with warranty terms, charge the
battery using a Motorola charger exactly as described
in the charger user guide. It is recommended your
radio remains powered off while charging.
Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial use
for best performance.
2 To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move the
battery latch ( ) into unlock position and hold, and
slide the battery down and off the rails.
Attaching the Battery
1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of the
radio. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwards
until the latch snaps into place. Slide battery latch
into lock position.
A
22
English
Caution: If antenna needs to be replaced,
ensure that only MOTOTRBO antennas are
used. Neglecting this will damage your radio.
Preparing Your Radio for Use
Attaching the Antenna
Attaching the Belt Clip
1 To attach the belt clip, align the grooves on the
clip with those on the battery and press downward
until you hear a click.
1 With the radio turned off, set the antenna in its
receptacle and turn clockwise.
2 To remove the antenna, turn the antenna
counterclockwise.
2 To remove the belt clip, press the belt clip tab
away from the battery using a key. Then slide the
clip upward and away from the radio.
23
English
Attaching the Universal Connector Cover
(Dust Cover)
The universal connector ( ) is located on the
antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect
MOTOTRBO accessories to the radio.
To remove the universal connector cover, press down
on the cover and turn the thumbscrew
counterclockwise.
Replace the dust cover when the universal connector
is not in use.
Powering Up the Radio
Preparing Your Radio for Use
A
Insert the hooked end of the cover into the slots
above the universal connector. Press downward on
the cover to seat the lower tab properly into the RF
connector.
Turn the thumbscrew clockwise to secure the
connector cover to the radio.
24
English
Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise
until you hear a click. You see MOTOTRBO (TM) on the
radio’s display momentarily, followed by a welcome
message or welcome image.
The LED lights up solid green ( ) and the Home
screen lights up if the backlight setting is set to turn
on automatically.
Preparing Your Radio for Use
To turn off the radio, rotate this knob
counterclockwise until you hear a click. You see a
brief Powering Down on the radio’s display.
Adjusting the Volume
To increase the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume
Control Knob clockwise.
A
Note: The Home screen does not light up during a
power up if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turning
the LED Indicator On or Off on page 151).
To decrease the volume, turn this knob
counterclockwise.
Note: Your radio can be programmed to have a
minimum volume offset where the volume level
cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum
volume. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up test
is successful.
Note: There is no power up tone if the radio tones/
alerts function is disabled (see Turning the Radio
Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 145).
If your radio does not power up, check your battery.
Make sure that it is charged and properly attached. If
your radio still does not power up, contact your
dealer.
25
English
Identifying Radio Controls
Radio Controls
19
1
18
2
17
Identifying Radio Controls
3
16
4
15
5
7
14
13
12
8
11
6
9
10
26
1
These buttons are programmable.
English
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Channel Selector Knob
On/Off/Volume Control Knob
LED Indicator
Side Button 1[1]
Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button
Side Button 2[1]
Side Button 3[1]
Front Button P1[1]
Menu/OK Button
4-Way Navigation Button
Keypad
Back/Home Button
Front Button P2[1]
Display
Microphone
Speaker
Universal Connector for Accessories
Emergency Button[1]
Antenna
You can use the 4–way navigation button,
, to
scroll through options, increase/decrease values, and
navigate vertically.
Category
Direction
or
or
Menu
Vertical
Navigation
-
Lists
Vertical
Navigation
-
View Details
Vertical
Navigation
Previous/Next
Item
You can use the 4–way navigation button,
a number, alias, or free form text editor.
Number
Identifying Radio Controls
Editor
Category
Using the 4–Way Navigation Button
Direction
or
-
or
Left : Delete last
digit
Right : -
Alias
-
Free Form Text
Move cursor up/ Move cursor
down
one character
right/left
Numeric Values Increase/
Decrease
-
Move cursor
one character
right/left
, as
27
English
Using the Keypad
You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to enter
subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The next
table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.
Identifying Radio Controls
Key
28
English
Number of Times Key is Pressed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
.
,
?
!
@
&
'
%
—
:
*
#
A
B
C
2
D
E
F
3
G
H
I
4
J
K
L
5
M
N
O
6
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
8
7
Identifying Radio Controls
Key
Number of Times Key is Pressed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
W
X
Y
Z
9
0
Note: Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off
the CAPS lock.
* or
del
Note: Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.
# or
Note: Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”. Long
space press to change text entry method.
29
English
Non-Connect Plus Operations
Non-Connect Plus Operations
30
English
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button
The PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) serves
two basic purposes:
A
•
While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows
the radio to transmit to other radios in the call.
Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release
the PTT button to listen.
The microphone is activated when the PTT button
is pressed.
•
While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is
used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call
on page 52).
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Additional Radio Controls in NonConnect Plus Mode
If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit
Tone On or Off on page 147) or the PTT Sidetone
is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before
talking.
During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature
is enabled on your radio (programmed by your
dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment
the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call)
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is
free for you to respond.
You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, if
your call is interrupted, indicating that you should
release the PTT button, for example when the radio
receives an Emergency Call.
Programmable Buttons
Your dealer can program the programmable buttons
as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the
duration of a button press:
•
Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.
31
English
•
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
Long press – Pressing and holding for the
programmed duration.
Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.
Note: The programmed duration of a button press is
applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or
settings. See Emergency Operation on page 96 for
more information on the programmed duration of the
Emergency button.
Call Log
Selects the call log list.
Contacts
Provides direct access to the
Contacts list.
Emergency
Depending on the
programming, initiates or
cancels an emergency.
Intelligent Audio
Toggles intelligent audio on or
off.
Manual Dial
Depending on the
programming, initiates a
Private or Phone Call by
keying in any subscriber ID or
phone number.
Manual Site
Roam[2]
Starts the manual site search.
Mic AGC On/Off
Toggles the internal
microphone automatic gain
control (AGC) on or off.
Monitor
Monitors a selected channel
for activity.
Notifications
Provides direct access to the
Notifications list.
Assignable Radio Functions
Audio Toggle
Toggles audio routing
between the internal radio
speaker and the speaker of
wired accessory.
Bluetooth® Audio
Switch
Toggles audio routing
between internal radio
speaker and external
Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
Call Alert
Call Forwarding
32
English
Provides direct access to the
contacts list for you to select a
contact to whom a Call Alert
can be sent.
Toggles Call Forwarding on or
off.
Temporarily removes an
unwanted channel, except for
the Selected Channel, from
the scan list. The Selected
Channel refers to the user’s
selected zone/channel
combination from which scan
is initiated.
One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined
Private, Phone or Group Call,
a Call Alert or a Quick Text
message.
Option Board
Feature
Toggles option board
feature(s) on or off for option
board-enabled channels.
Permanent
Monitor
Monitors a selected channel
for all radio traffic until function
is disabled.
Phone
Provides direct access to the
Phone Contacts list
Privacy
Toggles privacy on or off.
Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID.
Radio Check
Determines if a radio is active
in a system.
Radio Enable
Allows a target radio to be
remotely enabled.
Radio Disable
Allows a target radio to be
remotely disabled.
Remote Monitor
Turns on the microphone of a
target radio without it giving
any indicators.
Repeater/
Talkaround[2]
Toggles between using a
repeater and communicating
directly with another radio.
Scan[2]
Toggles scan on or off.
Site Info
Displays current Linked
Capacity Plus site name and
ID. Plays site announcement
voice messages for the
current site (this function is
unavailable when Voice
Announcement is disabled).
Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radio
searches the current site only.
When toggled off, the radio
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Nuisance Channel
Delete[2]
33
English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
searches other sites in
addition to the current site.
Status
Selects the status list menu.
Telemetry Control
Controls the Output Pin on a
local or remote radio.
Text Message
Selects the text message
menu.
Transmit Interrupt
Remote Dekey
34
2
Stops the transmission of a
remote monitored radio
without giving any indicators,
or an ongoing interruptible call
to free the channel.
Toggles voice announcement
on or off.
Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus
English
Toggles VOX on or off.
Zone
Allows selection from a list of
zones.
Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
Voice
Plays zone and channel
Announcement for announcement voice
Channel
messages for the current
channel. This function is
unavailable when Voice
Announcement is disabled.
Voice
Announcement
On/Off
Voice Operating
Transmission
(VOX)
All Tones/Alerts
Toggles all tones and alerts on
or off.
Backlight
Toggles display backlight on or
off.
Backlight
Brightness
Adjusts the brightness level.
Display Mode
Toggles the day/night display
mode on or off.
Keypad Lock
Toggles keypad between
locked and unlocked.
Power Level
Toggles transmit power level
between high and low.
You can access various radio functions through one
of the following ways:
Note: Your radio automatically exits the menu
after a period of inactivity and returns to your
Home screen.
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Accessing the Programmed Functions
Identifying Status Indicators
Display Icons
•
•
A short or long press of the relevant
programmable buttons.
Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:
1
to access the menu. Press the
Press
appropriate Menu Scroll button (
or
) to
access the menu functions.
2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press
the
button.
3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the
previous screen, press the
press the
screen.
button. Long
The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display
(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,
and menu entries.
The following are icons that appear on the radio’s
display. Icons are displayed on the status bar,
arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and
are channel specific.
Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI)
The number of bars displayed
represents the radio signal strength.
Four bars indicate the strongest signal.
This icon is only displayed while
receiving.
button to return to the Home
35
English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Monitor
Job Ticket Notification
Selected channel is being monitored.
Notification List has items to review.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but
there is no remote Bluetooth device
connected.
or
Power Level
Radio is set at Low power or Radio is
set at High power.
Tones Disable
Bluetooth Connected
The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The
icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth
device is connected.
Sign In
Radio is signed in to the remote server.
Sign Out
Radio is signed out of the remote server.
High Volume Data
Radio is receiving high volume data and
channel is busy.
36
English
Tones are turned off.
Option Board
The Option Board is enabled.
Option Board Non-Function
The Option Board is disabled.
Over-the-Air Programming Delay
Timer
Indicates time left before automatic
restart of radio.
Flexible Receive List
The GPS feature is enabled. The icon
stays lit when a position fix is available.
Flexible receive list is enabled.
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
GPS Available
Emergency
GPS Not Available/Out of Range
Radio is in Emergency mode.
The GPS feature is enabled but is not
receiving data from the satellite.
Secure
Scan[3][4]
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Scan feature is enabled.
Unsecure
Scan- Priority 1[3][4]
The Privacy feature is disabled.
Radio detects activity on channel/group
designated as Priority 1.
Site Roaming[3]
Scan- Priority 2[3][4]
Radio detects activity on channel/group
designated as Priority 2.
The site roaming feature is enabled.
Talkaround[3][4]
Vote Scan
In the absence of a repeater, radio is
currently configured for direct radio to
radio communication.
Vote scan feature is enabled.
Battery
37
English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The number of bars (0 – 4) shown
indicates the charge remaining in the
battery. Blinks when the battery is low.
Indicates a Group Call or All Call in
progress. In the Contacts list, it
indicates a group alias (name) or ID
(number).
Phone Call as Private Call
Call Icons
The following icons appear on the radio’s display
during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts
list to indicate ID type.
Private Call
Indicates a Private Call in progress. In
the Contacts list, it indicates a
subscriber alias (name) or ID
(number).
Group Call/All Call
3
38
4
Not applicable in Capacity Plus
Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus
English
Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call
in progress. In the Contacts list, it
indicates a phone alias (name) or ID
(number).
Phone Call as Group/All Call
Indicates a Phone Call as Group/All
Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it
indicates a group alias (name) or ID
(number).
Bluetooth PC Call
Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in
progress. In the Contacts list, it
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias
(name) or ID (number).
Successful Transmission
(Positive)
Successful action taken.
Advanced Menu Icons
Failed Transmission (Negative)
The following icons appear beside menu items that
offer a choice between two options or as an indication
that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
Failed action taken.
Transmission in Progress
(Transitional)
Checkbox (Empty)
Indicates the option is not selected.
Transmitting. This is seen before
indication for Successful
Transmission or Failed Transmission.
Checkbox (Checked)
Indicates the option is selected.
Solid Black Box
Indicates the option selected for the menu
item with a sub-menu.
Sent Item Icons
The following icons appear at the top right corner of
the radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.
Sent Successfully
Mini Notice Icons
The following icons appear momentarily on the
radio’s display after an action to perform task is
taken.
OR
The text message is sent successfully.
39
English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
OR
Send Failed
Bluetooth Audio Device
The text message has not been sent.
Bluetooth-enabled audio device,
such as a headset.
Bluetooth PTT Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such
as a PTT-Only Device (POD).
In-Progress
OR
•
•
The text message to a group alias or ID
is pending transmission.
The text message to a subscriber alias
or ID is pending transmission, followed
by waiting for acknowledgement.
Job Tickets Icons
All Jobs
Indicates all jobs listed.
Bluetooth Device Icons
New Jobs
The following icons also appear next to items in the
list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate
the device type.
Indicates new jobs.
LED Indicator
Bluetooth Data Device
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such
as a scanner.
40
English
The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status of
your radio.
Radio is scanning for
activity or receiving a Call
Alert, flexible receive list is
enabled or all local Linked
Capacity Plus channels
are busy.
Double blinking
yellow
Radio is no longer
connected to the repeater
while in Capacity Plus or
Linked Capacity Plus; all
Capacity Plus or Linked
Capacity Plus channels
are currently busy. Auto
Roaming is enabled, radio
is actively searching for a
new site. Also indicates
that radio has yet to
respond to a group call
alert, or radio is locked.
Solid green
Radio is powering up or
transmitting.
Blinking green
Radio is powering up,
receiving a non-privacyenabled call or data, or
A
Blinking red
Solid yellow
Radio is transmitting at low
battery condition, receiving
an emergency
transmission, has failed
the self-test upon powering
up, or has moved out of
range if radio is configured
with Auto-Range
Transponder System.
Radio is monitoring a
conventional channel or in
Bluetooth Discoverable
Mode.
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Blinking yellow
41
English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
detecting activity, or
retrieving Over-the-Air
Programming
transmissions over the air.
Double blinking green Radio is receiving a
privacy-enabled call or
data.
Note: While in conventional mode, when the LED
blinks green, it indicates the radio detects activity
over the air. Due to the nature of the digital protocol,
this activity may or may not affect the radio's
programmed channel.
For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there is
no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity
over the air.
Audio tones provide you with audible indications of
the status, or response to data received on the radio.
42
English
Sounds periodically
depending on the
duration set by the radio.
Tone starts, stops, and
repeats itself.
Repetitive Tone
A single tone that
repeats itself until it is
terminated by the user.
Momentary Tone
Sounds only once for a
short period of time
defined by the radio.
Indicator Tones
High pitched tone
Low pitched tone
Positive Indicator Tone
Audio Tones
Continuous Tone
Periodic Tone
A monotone sound.
Sounds continuously
until termination.
Negative Indicator Tone
Each channel in your radio can be configured as a
conventional analog or conventional digital channel.
Use the Channel Selector Knob ( ) to switch
between an analog or a digital channel.
Your radio also has features available in both analog
and digital mode. However, the minor differences in
the way each feature works does not affect the
performance of your radio.
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Switching Between Conventional Analog and
Digital Mode
Note: Your radio also switches between digital and
analog modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on
page 75).
IP Site Connect
A
When switching from digital to analog mode, certain
features are unavailable. Icons for the digital features
(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing
‘grayed out’. Disabled features are hidden in the
menu.
This feature allows your radio to extend conventional
communication beyond the reach of a single site, by
connecting to different available sites which are
connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and
into the range of another, it connects to the new site's
repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.
Depending on your settings, this is done
automatically or manually.
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans
through all available sites when the signal from the
current site is weak or when the radio is unable to
detect any signal from the current site. It then locks
on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal
Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.
43
English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the
next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but
which may not have the strongest signal) and locks
on to it.
Note: Each channel can only have either Scan or
Roam enabled, not both at the same time.
Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a
particular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s)
in the roam list during the automatic roam operation
to locate the best site.
A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels
(including the Selected Channel).
Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry to
the roam list. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
Capacity Plus
Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of
the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of
channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254
Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently
utilize the available number of programmed channels
while in Repeater Mode.
44
English
You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access
a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a
programmable button press.
Your radio also has features that are available in
conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, Capacity
Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor
differences in the way each feature works does not
affect the performance of your radio.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information on this configuration.
Linked Capacity Plus
Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channel
trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio
system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and
IP Site Connect configurations.
Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extend
trunking communication beyond the reach of a single
site, by connecting to different available sites which
are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It
also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently
utilizing the combined available number of
programmed channels supported by each of the
available sites.
in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you
try to access a feature not applicable to Linked
Capacity Plus via a programmable button press.
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
When the radio moves out of range from one site and
into the range of another, it connects to the new site's
repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.
Depending on your settings, this is done
automatically or manually.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information on this configuration.
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans
through all available sites when the signal from the
current site is weak or when the radio is unable to
detect any signal from the current site. It then locks
on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal
Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the
next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but
which may not have the strongest signal) and locks
on to it.
Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled can
be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches
these channels during the automatic roam operation
to locate the best site.
Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry to
the roam list. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features not
applicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available
45
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Making and Receiving Calls in NonConnect Plus Mode
Selecting a Zone
1 Access the Zone feature.
Steps
or
zone.
and scroll to the required
1 Enter the first character of the
required zone.
2 A blinking cursor appears allowing
you to continue entering the
subsequent characters of the
required zone.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Zone button
Press the programmed Zone
button.
Note: Press
Radio menu
1
to the right. Press the
key to
delete any unwanted characters.
to access the menu.
or
to Zone and
2
press
to select.
The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
.
2 Select the required zone.
English
or
Keypad
A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up
to 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of
160 channels per zone.
46
Radio
Control
the left. Press
Long press
entry method.
to move one space to
to move one space
to change the text
Note: The first line of the display
shows the characters you keyed in.
The second line shows a zone that
matches what you have already
keyed in. The alias search is case-
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
Steps
insensitive. If there are two or more
with the same name, the radio
displays the zone that is listed first in
the zone list.
3
Press
to select.
The display shows <Zone> Selected
momentarily and returns to the selected zone
screen.
Selecting a Channel
Transmissions are sent and received on a channel.
Depending on your radio’s configuration, each
channel may have been programmed differently to
support different groups of users or supplied with
different features. After selecting the relevant Zone,
select the relevant channel you require to transmit or
receive on.
Turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to
select the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group
alias or ID.
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call
Once the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID is
displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to
calls.
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
transmitting and blinks green when the radio is
receiving.
Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
transmitting and double blinks green when the radio
is receiving a privacy-enabled call.
47
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio
must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key
Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as
the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the
call from).
See Privacy on page 122 for more information.
Receiving and Responding to a Group Call
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio
must be configured as part of that group.
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home
screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line
shows the caller alias. The second text line displays
the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the
incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
•
48
English
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the
moment the transmitting radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond. Press the PTT button to
respond.
•
If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,
press the PTT button to stop the current call
from the transmitting radio and free the channel
for you to talk/respond.
The LED lights up solid green.
2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
The PTT Sidetone.
3 Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period
of time, the call ends.
See Making a Group Call on page 52 for details on
making a Group Call.
Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to
another individual radio.
When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks
green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
Ended.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
See Making a Private Call on page 53 for details on
making a Private Call.
•
•
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the
moment the transmitting radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond. Press the PTT button to
respond.
If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,
press the PTT button to stop the current call
from the transmitting radio and free the channel
for you to talk/respond.
The LED lights up solid green.
2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
3 Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period
of time, the call ends.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through
the radio's speaker.
Receiving an All Call
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every
radio on the channel. It is used to make important
announcements requiring the user’s full attention.
When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the
LED blinks green.
The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.
The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and
the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.
Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the
previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call
does not wait for a predetermined time before ending.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you hear a short alert tone the moment the
transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating
the channel is now available for use.
You cannot respond to an All Call.
49
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Note: See Making an All Call on page 54 for details
on making an All Call.
Note: The radio stops receiving the All Call if you
switch to a different channel while receiving the call.
During an All Call, you will not be able to use any
programmed button functions until the call ends.
Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call
A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to
another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an
analog system.
When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinks
green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias or
Selective Call or Alert with Call. The first text
line shows the Private Call icon. The radio displays
Selective Call or Alert with Call. Your radio
unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the
radio's speaker.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The LED lights up solid green.
50
English
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period
of time, the call ends.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
Ended.
See Making a Private Call on page 53 for details on
making a Private Call.
Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call
Phone Call as Private Call
When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, the
Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the
display shows the caller alias or Phone Call.
If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,
the first line of the display shows Unavailable and
your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the
previous screen when the call ends.
1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
2
Press
to end the call.
Press
to end the call.
The display shows Ending Phone Call.
The display shows Ending Phone Call.
If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
Call Ended.
If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
Call Ended.
If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
Call Ended.
If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone
Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the
telephone user to end the call.
If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone
Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the
telephone user to end the call.
Phone Call as Group Call
When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, the
Phone Group Call icon appears in the top right
corner; the display shows the group alias and Phone
Call.
If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,
the display shows Unavailable and your radio
mutes the call.
1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
Phone Call as All Call
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the
Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the
display shows All Call and Phone Call.
If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,
the first line of the display shows Unavailable and
your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the
previous screen when the call ends.
Note: When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call,
you can respond to the call or end the call, only if an
All Call type is assigned to the channel.
1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
51
English
2
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
to end the call.
Press
The display shows Ending Phone Call.
If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
All Call and Call Ended.
If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone
Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call.
Making a Radio Call
After selecting your channel, you can select a
subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
•
•
•
52
English
The Channel Selector Knob.
A programmed One Touch Access button – The
One Touch Access feature allows you to make a
Group or Private Call to a predefined ID easily.
This feature can be assigned to a short or long
programmable button press. You can ONLY have
one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button.
Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access
buttons programmed.
The programmed number keys – This method is
for Group, Private and All Calls only and is used
with the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or
•
•
•
All Call with the Programmable Number Key on
page 58).
A programmable button – This method is for
Phone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call with
the Programmable Phone Button on page 59).
The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page
78).
Manual Dial – This method is for Private and
Phone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad
(see Making a Phone Call from Contacts on page
80, Making a Private Call from Contacts on page
79, and Making a Call with the Programmable
Manual Dial Button on page 61).
Note: Your radio must have the Privacy feature
enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled
transmission. Only target radios with the same
Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as
your radio will be able to unscramble the
transmission.
Note: See Privacy on page 122 for more information.
Making a Group Call
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must
be configured as part of that group.
•
•
Select the channel with the active group alias
or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 47.
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the group call alias.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green. You see the Group Call icon, the group
alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on
your display.
5
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the
screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
1 Do one of the following.
Note: You can also make a Group Call via Contacts
(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on page
78).
Making a Private Call
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private
Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your
radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private
Call.
There are two types of Private Calls. The first type,
where a radio presence check is performed prior to
setting up the call, while the other sets up the call
immediately.
Only one of these call types can be programmed to
your radio by your dealer.
You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you
make a Private Call via the One Touch Access
button, the programmed number keys, or the Channel
Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled.
Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to
contact an individual radio. See Text Message
53
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Features on page 104 or Call Alert Operation on
page 94 for more information.
1 Do one of the following.
•
•
Select the channel with the active subscriber
alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page
47.
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
icon appears on the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
54
English
6
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. You hear a short
tone. The display shows Call Ended.
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
and see negative mini notice on the display. You can
also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a
Private Call from Contacts on page 79) or perform a
quick alphanumeric search for the required alias via a
keypad entry (see Making a Group, Private, Phone or
All Call by Alias Search on page 84).
Making an All Call
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the
channel. Your radio must be programmed to allow
you to use this feature.
Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line
shows All Call.
4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
The PTT Sidetone.
Making a Selective Call
Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or
respond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorized
individual radio, your radio must be programmed for
you to initiate a Selective Call.
1 Select the channel with the active subscriber alias
or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 47.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
1 Select the channel with the active All Call group
alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 47.
4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
The PTT Sidetone.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
55
English
radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If
the access code was preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you
were on prior to initiating the call.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The display shows Call Ended.
Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access
Button
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access
button to make a Phone Call to the predefined
alias or ID.
If the entry for the One Touch Access button is
empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the
access code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:.
Enter the access code and press
If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone
sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.
The Phone Call icon remains in the top right
corner.
English
3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone
Call, enter the extra digits using the keypad and
to proceed.
The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
56
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds
and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your
press
to proceed.
The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,
and the radio returns to the previous screen.
4
Press
to end the call.
If de-access code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the display shows De-Access
Code:. Do one of the following.
•
to
Enter the de-access code and press
proceed. The radio returns to the previous
screen.
Press the One Touch Access button. If the
entry for the One Touch Access button is
empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,
and the display shows Ending Phone Call.
During the call, if you press the One Touch
Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the
input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end
the call.
The access or deaccess code cannot be more
than 10 characters.
Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button
If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds
and the display shows Call Ended.
Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiated
from the Home screen.
If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio
returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 or
wait for the telephone user to end the call.
The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily
make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias
or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long
programmable button press.
Note: When the telephone user ends the call, a
tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended.
If the call ends while you are entering the extra
digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio
returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
the call.
During channel access, press
to dismiss the
call attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a
One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple
One Touch Call buttons programmed.
1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to
make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call
alias or ID.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
57
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green.
The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you will hear a short alert tone the moment the
target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the
channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key
58
The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to
make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias
or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the
available number keys on a keypad.
English
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a
number key, but you can have more than one number
key associated to an alias or ID.
1 Long press the programmed number key, when
you are on the Home screen, to make a Group,
Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.
If the number key is not associated to an entry, a
negative indicator tone sounds.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Group/Private
Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
text line shows the caller alias. The second text
line displays either the call status for a Private Call
or All Call for All Call.
4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only)
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
6
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the
screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the
call ends.
See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable
Number Key on page 85 for details on assigning
an entry to a number key on the keypad.
Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone
Button
1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into
the Phone Entry list.
2
or
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
to the required subscriber alias or ID,
and press
to select.
If the access code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:.
Enter the access code and press the
to proceed.
button
The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone
sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.
The Phone Call icon remains in the top right
corner.The second text line displays the call
status.
If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and
the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your
radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If
the access code was preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you
were on prior to initiating the call.
59
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
4 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
5 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone
Call, do one of the following.
•
•
Press any keypad key to begin the input of the
extra digits. The first line of the display shows
Extra Digits:. The second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits
button to proceed. The
and press the
DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the
previous screen.
Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF
tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch
Access button is empty, a negative indicator
tone sounds.
6
Press
60
English
to end the call.
If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the first line of the display shows DeAccess Code:. The second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code
and press the
button to proceed. The radio
returns to the previous screen.
The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows
Ending Phone Call.
If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds
and the display shows Call Ended.
If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio
returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4
and 6 or wait for the telephone user to end the
call.
When you press PTT button while in the Phone
Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display
shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.
When the telephone user ends the call, a tone
sounds and the display shows Phone Call
Ended.
If the call ends while you are entering the extra
digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio
returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
the call.
During the call, when you press One Touch
Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the
input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end
the call.
Note: The access or deaccess code cannot be
more than 10 characters.
Making a Private Call
1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to
enter into the Manual Dial screen.
2
3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.
5 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial
Button
or
to Radio Contact and press
select.
The display shows Number:.
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
Note: During channel access, press
to
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.
to
8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you will hear a short alert tone the moment the
target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the
channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. You hear a short
tone. The display shows Call Ended.
61
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Making a Phone Call
1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to
enter into the Manual Dial screen.
2
or
to Phone Contact and press
select.
The display shows Number:.
to
4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.
If the access code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:.
Enter the access code and press the
to proceed.
If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds
and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your
radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If
the access code was preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you
were on prior to initiating the call.
button
5 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
6 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone
Call, do one of the following.
•
The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone
sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone
user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.
The Phone Call icon remains in the top right
corner.
62
English
•
Press any keypad key to begin the input of the
extra digits. Enter the extra digits and press the
button to proceed. The DTMF tone
sounds and the radio returns to the previous
screen.
Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF
tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch
Access button is empty, a negative indicator
tone sounds.
Press
to end the call.
If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the display shows De-Access
Code:. Enter the deaccess code and press the
returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
the call.
Note: During channel access, press
to
dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.
The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows
Ending Phone Call.
Note: During the call, when you press One Touch
Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the
input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end
the call.
If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds
and the display shows Call Ended.
Note: The access or deaccess code cannot be
more than 10 characters.
button to proceed. The radio returns to the
previous screen.
If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio
returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 7 or
wait for the telephone user to end the call.
When you press PTT button while in the Phone
Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display
shows Press OK to Place Phone Call.
When the telephone user ends the call, a tone
sounds and the display shows Phone Call
Ended.
If the call ends while you are entering the extra
digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
7
Stopping a Radio Call
This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or
Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For
example, when a radio experiences a “stuck
microphone” condition where the PTT button is
inadvertently pressed by the user.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use
this feature.
63
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt
Remote Dekey button, while on the relevant
channel.
The display shows Remote Dekey.
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator
tone and the display shows Remote Dekey
Success, indicating that the channel is now free.
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative
indicator tone and the display shows Remote
Dekey Failed.
The Talkaround setting is retained even after
powering down.
You can toggle between talkaround and repeater
modes by pressing the programmed Repeater/
Talkaround button or using the radio menu as
described next.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
64
English
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Talkaround and press
to
4
You can also use
option.
This is called “talkaround”.
Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus
and Linked Capacity Plus.
to select.
3
Talkaround
You can continue to communicate when your
repeater is not operating, or when your radio is out of
the repeater’s range but within talking range of other
radios.
to Utilities and press
or
to
to change the selected
5
Press
to enable/disable the Talkaround.
The display shows
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Monitoring Features
Monitoring a Channel
Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is
clear before transmitting.
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and
Linked Capacity Plus.
1 Press and hold the programmed Monitor button
and listen for activity.
The Monitor icon appears on the display and the
LED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activity
or total silence, depending on how your radio is
programmed. This indicates that the channel is in
use.
The LED double blinks yellow when channel is
busy.
2
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The
3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
Permanent Monitor
Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuously
monitor a selected channel for activity.
Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus
and Linked Capacity Plus.
1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor
button to activate permanent monitoring of the
channel.
Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solid
yellow, and the display shows Permanent
Monitor On. The Monitor icon appears on the
display.
2 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor
button to exit Permanent Monitor mode.
Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, and
the display shows Permanent Monitor Off.
Wait until you hear “white noise”. This indicates
that the channel is free.
65
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect
Plus Mode
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio Check
Radio
Control
Steps
Menu
1
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and
2
If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if
another radio is active in a system without disturbing
the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification
is shown on the target radio.
This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases
or IDs.
Sending a Radio Check
press
to select.
3 Use one of the steps
described next to select the
required subscriber alias or
ID:
•
1 Access the Radio Check feature.
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
Radio Check
button
1 Press the programmed Radio
Check button.
2
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
press
66
English
to select.
Select the subscriber alias
or ID directly.
•
•
or
to the
required subscriber
alias or ID and press
to select.
Use the Manual Dial
menu.
Radio
Control
Steps
•
•
•
or
to Manual
Dial and press
to
select.
or
to Radio
Number and press
to select.
If there was previously
dialed ID, the ID
appears along with a
blinking cursor. Else,
the first line of the
display shows Radio
Number:; the second
line of the display
shows a blinking cursor.
Use the keypad to edit/
enter the ID, and press
to select.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
Steps
4
or
and press
to Radio Check
to select.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
indicating the request is in progress. The LED
lights up solid green.
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
button is pressed when the radio is
If the
waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and
the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio
Check mode.
If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicator
tone sounds and the display shows positive mini
notice.
If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negative
indicator tone sounds and the display shows
negative mini notice.
Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
67
English
Remote Monitor
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the
microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs
only). The green LED will blink once on the target
subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,
remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target
radio.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use
this feature.
Initiating Remote Monitor
Radio
Control
Steps
Menu
1
to access the menu
or
to Contacts and
2
press
to select
3 Use one of the steps described
next to select the required
subscriber alias or ID
•
1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.
Radio
Control
Steps
•
Programm 1 Press the programmed Remote
ed Remote
Monitor button.
Monitor
2
or
to the required
Button
subscriber alias or ID and press
to select.
68
English
select the subscriber alias or
ID directly
•
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
to select.
press
use the Manual Dial menu
•
or
to Manual
Dial and press
select.
to
The display shows transitional mini notice,
indicating the request is in progress. The LED
lights up solid green.
Steps
•
or
Number and press
to
select.
If there was previously
dialed ID, the ID appears
along with a blinking
cursor. Else, the first line
of the display shows
Radio Number:; the
second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor.
Use the keypad to edit/
enter the ID, and press
•
4
to Radio
or
press
to select.
to Remote Mon. and
to select.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio
starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a
programmed duration and display shows Rem.
Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds
an alert tone and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative
indicator tone the display shows negative mini
notice.
Stopping Remote Monitor
Remote Monitor automatically stops after a
programmed duration or when there is any user
operation on the target radio. Follow the steps below
to manually stop Remote Monitor.
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt
Remote Dekey button.
69
English
The display shows transitional mini notice,
indicating the request is in progress. The LED
lights up solid green.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator
tone and the display shows positive mini notice.
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative
indicator tone and the display shows negative mini
notice.
Scan Lists
Scan lists are created and assigned to individual
channels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activity
by cycling through the channel/group sequence
specified in the scan list for the current channel/
group.
Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a
maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list
supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries.
You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing
a scan list.
70
English
You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front
Panel Programming.
Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus
and Linked Capacity Plus.
Viewing an Entry in the Scan List
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Scan List and press
3
4 Use
or
to select.
to view each member on the list.
The Priority icon appears left of the member’s
alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on
a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot
have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a
scan list.
There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.
1
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are
two or more entries with the same name, the radio
displays the entry that is listed first in the scan list.
Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search
Editing the Scan List
2
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Scan List and press
Adding a New Entry to the Scan List
3
to select.
1
to access the menu.
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
A blinking cursor appears.
2
5 Use the keypad to type the required alias.
3
Press
to move one space to the left. Press
to
key
move one space to the right. Press the
to delete any unwanted characters. Long press
to change text entry method.
The first line of the display shows the characters
you keyed in. The next lines of the display show
the shortlisted search results.
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Scan List and press
to select.
4
or
select.
to Add Member and press
to
5 Select the required alias or ID by performing one
of the following actions:
71
English
Radio
Control
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Navigation
Buttons
Keypad
Steps
Radio
Control
or
to the required alias or
Key in the first character of the
required alias.
6
A blinking cursor appears.
7
to move one space to the
left. Press
to move one space to
key to
the right. Press the
delete any unwanted characters.
72
English
the same name, the radio displays
the alias that is listed first in the list.
ID.
Press
Steps
Press
or
to select.
to the required priority level and press
to select.
The display shows positive mini notice, followed
immediately by Add Another?.
8 Do one of the following:
Long press
to change the
text entry method.
•
The first line of the display shows
the characters you keyed in. The
next lines of the display show the
short listed search results. The
alias search is case-insensitive. If
there are two or more aliases with
•
or
to Yes and press
repeat Steps 5 to 7.
or
to No and press
current list.
to select, and
to save the
Radio
Control
1
to access the menu.
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Scan List and press
Long press
to change the
text entry method.
3
to select.
The first line of the display shows
the characters you keyed in. The
next lines of the display show the
short listed search results. The
alias search is case-insensitive. If
there are two or more aliases with
the same name, the radio displays
the alias that is listed first in the list.
4 Select the required alias or ID by performing one
of the following actions:
Radio
Navigation
Buttons
Keypad
Steps
or
to the required alias or
ID.
Key in the first character of the
required alias.
A blinking cursor appears.
Press
to move one space to the
left. Press
Steps
the right. Press the
key to
delete any unwanted characters.
2
Radio
Control
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Deleting an Entry from the Scan List
to move one space to
5
Press
to select.
6
or
to Delete and press
to select.
7 Do one of the following:
73
English
•
At Delete Entry?,
or
to Yes and
press
to delete entry. The display shows
positive mini notice.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
or
to No and press
previous screen.
to return to the
1
to access the menu.
or
to the required alias or
ID.
Key in the first character of the
required alias.
A blinking cursor appears.
to move one space to the
left. Press
to move one space to
key to
the right. Press the
delete any unwanted characters.
Long press
to change the
text entry method.
2
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Scan List and press
3
to select.
4 Select the required alias or ID by performing one
of the following actions:
English
Steps
Press
to return to the Home screen.
Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the
Scan List
74
Radio
Navigation
Buttons
Keypad
8 Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to delete other entries.
After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long
press
Radio
Control
The first line of the display shows
the characters you keyed in. The
next lines of the display show the
short listed search results. The
alias search is case-insensitive. If
there are two or more aliases with
Steps
Scan
the same name, the radio displays
the alias that is listed first in the list.
to select.
6
or
select.
7
or
to Edit Priority and press
When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the
programmed scan list for the current channel looking
for voice activity.
The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears on
the status bar.
5
Press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
to
to the required priority level and press
to select.
The display shows positive mini notice before
returning to the previous screen.
During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital
channel, and your radio locks onto an analog
channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to
analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also
true for the reverse.
There are two ways of initiating scan:
•
Note: The Priority icon appears left of the
member’s name.
There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.
•
Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans
all the channels/groups in your scan list. On
entering scan, your radio may – depending on the
settings – automatically start on the last scanned
“active” channel/group or on the channel where
scan was initiated.
Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically
starts scanning when you select a channel/group
that has Auto Scan enabled.
Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus
and Linked Capacity Plus.
75
English
Starting and Stopping Scan
•
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
While scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g.
text message, location, or PC data) if received on its
Selected Channel.
1 Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a
channel programmed with a scan list.
2
to access the menu.
3
or
to Scan and press
to select.
4
or
select.
to Scan State and press
to
5
or
to required scan state and press
to select.
•
76
English
The display shows Scan On when Scan is
enabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scan
icon appears.
The display shows Scan Off if Scan is
disabled. The LED turns off and the scan icon
disappears.
Responding to a Transmission During a Scan
During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group
where activity is detected. The radio stays on that
channel for a programmed time period known as
“hang time”.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
2 Press the PTT button during hang time.
The LED lights up solid green.
3 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
The PTT Sidetone.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
Deleting a Nuisance Channel
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or
noise (termed a “nuisance” channel), you can
temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the
scan list.
This capability does not apply to the channel
designated as the Selected Channel.
Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possible
through the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete
button. This feature is not accessible through the
menu.
1 When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted or
nuisance channel, press the programmed
Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a
tone.
2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button.
The nuisance channel is deleted.
Restoring a Nuisance Channel
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If you do not respond within the hang time, the
radio returns to scanning other channels/groups.
To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of
the following:
•
•
•
Turn the radio off and then power it on again.
Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan
button or menu.
Change the channel via the Channel Selector
Knob.
Vote Scan
Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in
areas where there are multiple base stations
transmitting identical information on different analog
channels.
Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base
stations and performs a voting process to select the
strongest received signal. Once that is established,
your radio unmutes to transmissions from that base
station.
The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan icon
appears on the status bar.
77
English
To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan,
follow the same procedures as Responding to a
Transmission During a Scan on page 76.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Contact Settings
Contacts provides “address-book” capabilities on your
radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that
you use to initiate a call.
Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog
contacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximum
of 500 members for each Contacts list.
Each entry within Contacts displays the following
information:
Each entry, depending on context, associates with
one of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All
Call, PC Call or Dispatch Call.
•
•
•
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are
only available with the applications. Refer to the data
applications documentation for more information.
Note: You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the
Digital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only
be performed by your dealer.
Note: If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,
you can make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private
Call, and All Call on that channel. Only target radios
with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value
and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble
the transmission.
For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view the
subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate a
Call Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can only
be performed by your dealer.
See Privacy on page 122 for more information.
78
on a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key,
your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry.
Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign
each entry to a programmable number key or more
English
Call Type.
Call Alias.
Call ID.
Making a Group Call from Contacts
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Contacts and press
to select.
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
or
to the required group alias or ID.
4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
5 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green.
6 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
The PTT Sidetone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
When any user in the group responds, the LED
blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the
group ID, and the user’s ID on your display.
8
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
Making a Private Call from Contacts
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
to select.
3 Use one of the steps described next to select the
required subscriber alias or ID:
•
select the subscriber alias or ID directly
•
•
or
to the required subscriber alias or
to select.
ID and press
use the Manual Dial menu
•
or
to Manual Dial and press
to select.
•
or
to Radio Number and press
to select.
79
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
If there was previously dialed subscriber
alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along
with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of
the display shows Radio Number:; the
second line of the display shows a blinking
cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID.
Press
to select.
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
The display shows Call Ended.
Making a Phone Call from Contacts
4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
1
5 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the destination alias.
2
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
3 Use one of the steps described next to select the
required subscriber alias or ID:
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green and the display shows the transmitting
user's ID.
8
80
English
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
•
select the subscriber alias or ID directly
•
•
to select.
or
to the required subscriber alias or
ID and press
to select.
use the Manual Dial menu
or
to Manual Dial and press
to select.
•
•
or
to Phone Number and press
to select.
The first line of the display shows Phone
Number: , the second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to
enter a telephone number, and press
to select the entered number.
If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator
tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call
Invalid # .
When you press PTT button while in the Phone
Contacts screen, a negative indicator tone sounds
and the display shows Press OK to Place
Phone Call.
4
or
select.
to Call Phone and press
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
5 If the access code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the first line of the display shows
Access Code: . The second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code
and press
to proceed.
to dismiss the
During channel access, press
call attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds.
Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen.
The access code cannot be more than 10
characters.
The first line of the display shows Calling. The
second line of the display shows the subscriber
alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon.
If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear
the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line
of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID,
and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display
shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon.
If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display
shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to
the Access Code input screen. If the access code
was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio
81
English
returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating
the call.
Note: The DTMF tone sounds.
If the entry for the One Touch Access button
is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
During the call, when you press One Touch
Access button with the deaccess code
preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the
input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end
the call.
7 Do one of the following:
•
Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
During channel access and access/deaccess code
or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to
On/Off/Volume Control Knob and Channel
Selector Knob only. A tone sounds for every
invalid input.
Note: The RSSI icon disappears during
transmission.
To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone
Call, press any keypad key to begin the input of
extra digits. The first line of the display shows
Extra Digits: . The second line of the
display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra
digits and press
to proceed. The DTMF
tone sounds and the radio returns to the
previous screen.
82
English
•
If the call ends while you are entering the extra
digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio
returns to the screen you were on prior to
initiating the call.
Press One Touch Access button.
8
Press
to end the call.
9 If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the
Contacts list, the first line of the display shows DeAccess Code:. The second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code
and press
to proceed.
The deaccess code cannot be more than 10
characters.
If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Call
Phone screen.
If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone
Call screen. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 or wait for the
telephone user to end the call.
When the telephone user ends the call, a tone
sounds and the display shows Phone Call
Ended.
Making a Call Alias Search
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to
retrieve the required subscriber alias.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.
Note: Press
button or
to exit alias search.
If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting
up the call, it exits without any indication and returns
to the previous screen.
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
and see negative mini notice on the display. The
radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio
presence check.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows
Ending Phone Call.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
to select.
3 Key in the first character of the required alias.
A blinking cursor appears.
4 Use the keypad to type the required alias.
Press
to move one space to the left. Press
to
move one space to the right. Press the
key
to delete any unwanted characters. Long press
to change text entry method.
The first line of the display shows the characters
you keyed in. The next lines of the display show
the short listed search results. The alias search is
83
English
case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries
with the same name, the radio displays the entry
that is listed first in the Contacts list.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
6 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the destination alias.
7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
8 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
9
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
84
English
The display shows Call Ended.
Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias
Search
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to
retrieve the required subscriber alias.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.
Note: Press
button or
to exit alias search.
If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting
up the call, it exits without any indication and returns
to the previous screen.
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
and see Party Not Available on the display; the
radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio
presence check.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
to select.
8 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
4 Use the keypad to type the required alias.
Press to move one space to the left. Press to
9 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
move one space to the right. Press the
key
to delete any unwanted characters.
The first line of the display shows the characters
you keyed in. The second line of the display
shows an alias that matches what you have keyed
in. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are
two or more entries with the same name, the radio
displays the entry that is listed first in the Contacts
list.
5
or
10 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you will hear a short alert tone the moment the
target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the
channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT
button to respond.
If there is no voice activity for a programmed
period of time, the call ends.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
Ended.
to scroll to desired entry, if necessary.
6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
7 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The first line
displays the target radio’s ID. The second line
displays the call type and the Call icon.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3 Key in the first character of the required alias.
A blinking cursor appears.
Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key
Note: See Making a Group, Private or All Call with
the Programmable Number Key on page 58 for
details on making a Group, Private or All Call with the
programmed number key(s).
1
to access the menu.
85
English
2
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3
or
to select.
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
4
or
select.
5
or
to Program Key and press
to
to the desired number key and press
If the number key is currently assigned to another
entry, the display shows The Key is Already
Assigned and then, the first line of the display
shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following.
•
to overwrite
86
English
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the
display shows positive mini notice.
The screen automatically returns to the previous
menu.
1 Access the required alias or ID via:
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
number key
Long press the programmed
number key to the required alias
or ID; press
•
or
to No and press
previous step.
If a number key is assigned to an entry in a
particular mode, this feature is not supported when
you long press the number key in another mode.
Removing the Association between Entry and
Programmable Number Key
to select.
or
to Yes and press
the number key assignment.
Each entry can be associated to different number
keys. You see a before each number key that is
assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that
number key is not assigned.
to return to the
to select.
Steps
Menu
1
2
Note: When an entry is deleted, the association
between the entry and its programmed number
key(s) is removed.
press
to Program Key and press
The screen automatically returns to the previous
menu.
Adding a New Contact
1
to access the menu.
2
to select.
or
2
or
select.
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the
display shows positive mini notice.
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and
press
to select. The
entries are alphabetically
sorted.
3
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
to
3
or
to Empty and press
to select.
The first line of the display shows Clear from
all keys? .
to Contacts and press
to select.
3
or
select.
4
to New Contact and press
to
or
to the required contact type, either
Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press
to select.
4
or
to Yes and press
to select.
87
English
5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and
press
4
or
select.
to confirm.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
to confirm.
7 If adding a Radio Contact,
or
1
to access the menu.
2
88
English
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert
1
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and press
or
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
Call Indicator Settings
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a
received Call Alert.
Setting a Default Contact
3
A appears beside the selected default alias or
ID.
to the
required ringer type and press
to select.
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the
display shows positive mini notice.
to
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the
display shows positive mini notice.
6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and
press
to Set as Default and press
to select.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
4
1
or
select.
to Tones/Alert and press
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
or
select.
to Call Alert and press
to
to access the menu.
2
5
or
to
to
.
to the required tone and press
You can also use
option.
or
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
to
or
select.
to Private Call and press
to
4
7
or
select.
to select.
3
6
The current tone is indicated by a
to Utilities and press
to
to change the selected
appears beside selected tone.
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
Calls
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
Private Call.
5
6
You can also use
option.
or
to change the selected
89
English
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective
Call
The current tone is indicated by a .
You can also use
option.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a
received Selective Call.
or
to the required tone and press
select.
appears beside selected tone.
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alert and press
to
4
to
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
Message
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
Text Message.
1
to
to access the menu.
2
5
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
or
to
or
select.
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
6
English
to change the selected
7
1
90
or
to Selective Call and press
to
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
4
2
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
to
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
5
to
to
to
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry
Status with Text
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
Telemetry Status with Text.
1
to access the menu.
to
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
to
5
7
or
to the required tone and press
select.
appears beside selected tone.
to Radio Settings and press
4
6
or
to Text Message and press
select.
The current tone is indicated by a .
or
select.
6
or
to Telemetry and press
The current tone is indicated by a .
to select.
7 Do one of the following:
•
or
to the preferred tone and press
to select. The display shows Tone <Number>
Selected and a appears left of the selected
tone.
91
English
•
or
to Turn Off and press
to
select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer
Off and a appears left of Turn Off.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
You can program your radio to sound one of ten
predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert
or a Text Message from a particular contact.
The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate
through the list.
to access the menu.
2
or
to select.
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
English
Call Log Features
You can perform the following tasks in each of your
call lists:
•
•
•
Store ID to Contacts
Delete
View Details
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
or
select.
to
You can program your radio to continually alert you
when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done
by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume
over time. This feature is known as Escalert.
Viewing Recent Calls
4
92
to the required tone and press
appears beside selected tone.
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,
answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log
feature to view and manage recent calls.
1
3
or
select.
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
Assigning Ring Styles
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
5
to Edit Ringtone and press
to
3
to access the menu.
or
select.
2
or
to Call Log and press
to select.
to
or
to Store and press
to select.
A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the
or
to preferred list and press
to
select.
The display shows the most recent entry at the top
of the list.
or
to view the list.
Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with
the current selected alias or ID.
to the required list and press
4
3
4
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
1
alias for that ID and press
shows positive mini notice.
. The display
Deleting a Call from a Call List
1
to access the menu.
2
Storing an Alias from a Call List
or
You can also store an ID without an alias.
to Call Log and press
to select.
3
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Call Log and press
to select.
or
to the required list and press
to
select.
When you select a call list and it contains no
entries, the display shows List Empty, and
sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
93
English
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
141).
4
or
or
select.
to the required alias or ID and press
4
to select.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3
or
to the required list and press
to
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
5
or
select.
to Delete Entry? and press
to
5
or
to View Details and press
select.
Display shows details.
6 Do one of the following:
to
•
Press
to select Yes to delete the entry.
The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
or
to No, and press the
return to the previous screen.
button to
1
Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert
to access the menu.
2
94
English
to Call Log and press
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio
user to call you back when they are able to do so.
This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs
only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts
or manual dial.
Viewing Details from a Call List
or
Call Alert Operation
to select.
When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the
notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of
the calling radio on the display, .
•
Press the PTT button while the display still
shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to
respond with a Private Call.
•
or
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED
blinks yellow, do one of the following:
to the required subscriber alias or
ID and press
to select.
use the Manual Dial menu
•
or
to Manual Dial and press
to select.
•
Press
to exit the Notification List. The alert
is moved to the Missed Call Log.
•
See Notification List on page 139 for details about
the Notification List.
•
See Call Log Features on page 92 for details
about the Missed Call List.
Making a Call Alert from the Contact List
or
to Radio Number and press
to select.
The first line of the display shows Radio
Number: , the second line of the display
shows a blinking cursor. Enter the
subscriber ID you want to page and press
.
1
to access the menu.
4
2
or
to Contacts and press
to select.
3 Use one of the steps described next to select the
required subscriber alias or ID:
•
select the subscriber alias or ID directly
or
select.
to Call Alert and press
to
The display shows Call Alert and the
subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert
has been sent.
The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
sending the Call Alert.
95
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the
display shows positive mini notice.
any time on any screen display even when there is
activity on the current channel.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,
the display shows negative mini notice.
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for
the programmed Emergency button, except for long
press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias
or ID.
The display shows Call Alert and the
subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert
has been sent.
The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
sending the Call Alert.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the
display shows positive mini notice.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,
the display shows negative mini notice.
Emergency Operation
96
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical
situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at
English
Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75
seconds.
Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75
seconds.
The Emergency button is assigned with the
Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for
the assigned operation of the Emergency button.
Note: If the short press for the Emergency button is
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the
long press for the Emergency button is assigned to
exit the Emergency mode.
If the long press for the Emergency button is
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the
short press for the Emergency button is assigned to
exit the Emergency mode.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
•
Emergency Alarm.
Emergency Alarm with Call.
Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow.
•
Note: Only ONE of the Emergency Alarms above can
be assigned to the programmed Emergency button.
•
In addition, each alarm has the following types:
•
•
•
Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal and
shows audio and/or visual indicators.
Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal without
any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls
without any sound through the radio’s speaker,
until you press the PTT button to initiate the call.
Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarm
signal without any audio or visual indicators, but
allow incoming calls to sound through the radio’s
speaker.
Receiving an Emergency Alarm
On receiving an emergency alarm the emergency
icon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red and
the radio displays the emergency caller alias. If more
than one alarm has occurred all emergency caller
aliases are displayed in an Alarm List.
1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one of
the following:
If a single emergency call alias is displayed,
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
•
press
to view more details. press
again to view your action details.
If the multiple emergency caller aliases are
displayed in the Alarm List,
or
to the
required alias and press
details. Press
items.
to view more
again to view your action
2
Press
and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.
To revisit the Alarm List, press
menu and select Alarm List.
to access the
Responding to an Emergency Alarm
1 In the Alarm List,
or
to the required alias.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,
you will hear a short alert tone the moment the
97
English
transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is now available for use.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency
voice to the same group that the Emergency
Alarm was targeted to.
Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the
emergency initiating radio. All other radios
(including the emergency receiving radio) transmit
non-emergency voice.
The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remains
in the Emergency mode.
4 Do one of the following:
•
•
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if
enabled) and speak clearly into the
microphone.
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the emergency initiating radio responds, the
LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,
the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your
display.
98
English
6 Your radio displays the Alarm List.
Sending an Emergency Alarm
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,
a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication
on a group of radios.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode.
Press the programmed Emergency On button.
The display shows one of the following:
•
•
Tx Alarm and the destination alias.
Tx Telegram and the destination alias.
The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency
icon appears on the Home screen display.
When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is
received, the Emergency tone sounds and the
LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.
If your radio does not receive an Emergency
Alarm acknowledgement, and after all retries have
been exhausted, a tone sounds and the display
shows Alarm Failed.
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm
to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a
radio within the group, the group of radios can
communicate over a programmed Emergency
channel.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or
allow any received calls to sound through the radio’s
speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the
call.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not
display any audio or visual indicators during
Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound
through the radio’s speaker. The indicators only
appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or
respond to, the call.
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.
The display shows one of the following:
•
Tx Alarm and the destination alias.
•
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and
returns to the Home screen.
Tx Telegram and the destination alias.
The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency
icon appears on the Home screen display.
When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is
received, the Emergency tone sounds and the
LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm
Sent.Your radio enters the emergency call mode
when the display shows Emergency and the
destination group alias.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green and the Group icon
appears on the display.
4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
•
•
The Talk Permit Tone.
The PTT Sidetone.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment
99
English
the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
6 Press the PTT button to respond.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button
to exit the Emergency mode.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm
to a group of radios. Your radio’s microphone is
automatically activated, allowing you to communicate
with the group of radios without pressing the PTT
button.
This activated microphone state is also known as “hot
mic”.
If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,
repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made
for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle
Mode, received calls sound through the radio’s
speaker.
100
If you press the PTT button during the programmed
receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating
that you should release the PTT button. The radio
English
ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergency
mode.
Note: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and
continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires,
the radio continues to transmit until you release the
PTT button.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or
allow any received calls to sound through the radio’s
speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission
period is over, and you press the PTT button.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not
display any audio or visual indicators during
Emergency mode when you are making the call with
hot mic, but allow sound through the radio’s speaker
when the target radio responds after the programmed
hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators
only appear when you press the PTT button.
Note: If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio
does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot
mic state directly.
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.
The display shows one of the following:
Tx Alarm and the destination alias.
Tx Telegram and the destination alias.
There are two instances where this can happen:
•
The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency
icon is displayed.
2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak
clearly into the microphone.
When hot mic has been enabled, the radio
automatically transmits without a PTT button press
until the hot mic duration expires. While
transmitting, the LED lights up solid green and the
Emergency icon appears on the display.
3 The radio automatically stops transmitting when
the cycling duration between hot mic and receiving
calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is
enabled.
4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio
automatically stops transmitting. To transmit
again, press the PTT button.
Reinitiating an Emergency Mode
Note: This feature is only applicable to the radio
sending the Emergency Alarm.
•
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
•
You change the channel while the radio is in
Emergency mode. This exits the Emergency
mode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this new
channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.
You press the programmed Emergency On
button during an Emergency initiation/transmission
state. This causes the radio to exit this state, and
to reinitiate Emergency.
Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency
Alarm
Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the
following occurs:
•
•
•
Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received
(for Emergency Alarm only).
All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted.
The Emergency Off button is pressed.
Note: If your radio is powered off, it exits the
Emergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate the
Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on
again.
101
English
If you change channels when your radio is in
Emergency mode to a channel that has no
emergency system configured, No Emergency is
shown on your display.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Analog Message Encode
Your radio is able to send pre-programmed
messages from the Message list to a radio alias or to
the dispatcher.
Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher
1
2
to access the menu.
or
2
to Message and press
Sending 5–Tone Message Encode to Contact
to access the menu.
1
or
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and
the display shows negative mini notice.
3
to Quick Text and press
or
send.
to the required message. Press
to
English
or
select.
to Quick Text and press
or
select.
to the required message. Press
or
select.
to the required contact. Press
to
4
4
102
to select.
3
to select.
or
select.
to Message and press
to
to
5
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
3
or
select.
If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
If the status update is acknowledged, a tone
sounds and the display shows positive mini notice.
A appears beside the acknowledged status.
Analog Status Update
The last acknowledged message is kept at the top of
the Status List. The other messages are arranged in
alphanumeric order.
Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact
to
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your status update is being sent.
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and
the display shows negative mini notice.
Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messages
from the Status List indicating your current activity to
a radio contact (for 5-Tone systems) or to the
dispatcher (for MDC systems).
to Set as Default and press
If the status update is not acknowledged, a low
tone sounds and the display shows negative mini
notice. A remains beside the previous status.
For 5-Tone systems, see Setting a Default Contact on
page 88 for details on setting the default contact.
For 5-Tone systems, a PTT button press while in the
status list sends the selected status update and
returns to the Home screen to initiate a voice call.
Viewing a 5-Tone Status Details
1
or
to Status and press
to select.
Note: A Software License Key sold separately is
required to use this feature.
2
or
select.
to the required status and press
to
1
or
to Status and press
to select.
103
English
2
or
select.
to the required status and press
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3
or
to View Details and press
to
select.
The display shows details of the selected status.
Text Message Features
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
message, from another radio or an e-mail application.
Editing 5–Tone Status Details
The maximum length of characters for a text
message, including the subject line (seen when
receiving message from an e-mail application), is 140
whereas for receiving this is 280 characters.
1
or
to Status and press
to select.
2
or
select.
to the required status and press
to
3
or
4
104
English
once editing is
the text entry method. Press
complete.
The display shows Status Saved and radio
returns to Status List.
to Edit and press
A blinking cursor appears. Press
to select.
to move one
space to the left. Press
to move one space to
the right. Press the
key to delete any
unwanted characters. Long press
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity
timer expires. Any text message in the writing/editing
screen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.
to change
Note: Long press
Home screen.
at any time to return to the
Writing and Sending a Text Message
1 Access the Text Message feature.
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
2
Press
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
•
to select.
•
or
to Compose and press
A blinking cursor appears.
to select.
•
2
the
Press the
to send the
or
to Save, and press
message to the Drafts folder.
to save the
•
or
key to move one space to the right.
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method.
or
to Send, and press
message.
to edit the message.
3 Use the keypad to type your message.
to move one space to the left. Press
once message is composed.
5 Depending on whether you want to send, save, reedit, or delete the newly composed message, do
one of the following.
and press
Press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
4
Radio Controls
to change text entry
to choose between deleting the message
or saving it to the Drafts folder.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows positive mini notice.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
105
English
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 108.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
Access Button
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button to send a predefined Quick Text message
to a predefined alias or ID.
The display shows the transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the
display shows the positive mini notice.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows the negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 108).
Accessing the Drafts Folder
You can save a text message to send it at a later
time.
106
English
If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the
radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen
while you are in the process of writing or editing a text
message, your current text message is automatically
saved to the Drafts folder.
The most recent saved text message is always added
to the top of the Drafts list.
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last
saved messages. When the folder is full, the next
saved text message automatically replaces the oldest
text message in the folder.
Note: Long press
Home screen.
at any time to return to the
Viewing a Saved Text Message
1 Access the Text Message feature.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Steps
Menu
1
2
Press
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method.
to change text entry
4
2
3
Press the
to select.
or
key to move one space to the right.
the
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to move one space to the left. Press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio Controls
or
to Drafts and press
or
to the required message and press
to select.
Press
once message is composed.
5 Select the message recipient by
•
or
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message
1
Press
again while viewing the message.
2
or
to Edit and press
A blinking cursor appears.
to select.
3 Use the keypad to type your message.
to select.
•
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows Radio
Number:. The second line of the display shows
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
ID and press
.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
107
English
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows positive mini notice.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to
the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send
Failed icon.
Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts
1 Access the Text Message feature.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
108
English
to Drafts and press
or
to the required message and press
to select.
4
or
to Delete and press
text message.
to delete the
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages
You can select one of the following options while at
the Resend option screen:
•
•
•
Resend.
Forward.
Edit.
Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or
Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a
match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-to-Send
message.
Resending a Text Message
to select.
2
or
3
to select.
Press
to resend the same message to the
same subscriber/group alias or ID.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows positive mini notice.
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows
the negative mini notice.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
Forwarding a Text Message
Editing a Text Message
Select Forward to send the message to another
subscriber/group alias or ID.
Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.
1
or
to Forward and press
to select.
2 Select the message recipient by
•
or
to the required alias or ID and press
Note: If a subject line is present (for messages
received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit
it.
1
or
to Edit and press
A blinking cursor appears.
to select.
2 Use the keypad to edit your message.
to select.
•
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows Radio
Number:. The second line of the display shows
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
ID and press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows the positive mini notice.
.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
Press
to move one space to the left. Press
the
Press the
or
key to move one space to the right.
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method.
to change text entry
109
English
•
3
Press
once message is composed.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, reedit, or delete the newly composed message, do
one of the following.
ID and press
•
to send the
The display shows Text Message:
<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirming
your message is being sent.
or
to Save, and press
message to the Drafts folder.
to save the
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows positive mini notice.
•
to edit the message.
•
to choose between deleting the message
or saving it to the Drafts folder.
5 If you are sending the message, select the
recipient by
or
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
110
English
.
or
to Send, and press
message.
•
•
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows Radio
Number:. The second line of the display shows
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
Managing Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved
in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is
always added to the top of the Sent Items list.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a
maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the
folder is full, the next sent text message automatically
replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
A subject line may be shown if the message is
from an e-mail application.
at any time to return to the
The icon at the top right corner of the screen
indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item
Icons on page 39).
Viewing a Sent Text Message
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
select.
3
or
to Sent Items and press
to
to the required message and press
to select.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Note: Long press
Home screen.
Sending a Sent Text Message
You can select one of the following options while
viewing a sent text message:
•
•
•
•
Resend
Forward
Edit
Delete
Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or
Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a
match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent
message.
1
2
Press
again while viewing the message.
or
to one of the following options and
press
to select.
111
English
Option
Steps
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Forward Select Forward to send the selected
text message to another subscriber/
group alias or ID (see Forwarding a
Text Message on page 109).
Edit
Select Edit to edit the selected text
message before sending it (see Editing
a Text Message on page 109).
Delete
Select Delete to delete the text
message.
Resend
Select Resend to resend the selected
text message to the same subscriber/
group alias or ID.
The display shows transitional mini
notice, confirming that the same
message is being sent to the same
target radio.
If the message is sent successfully, a
tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
112
English
Option
Steps
If the message cannot be sent, a low
tone sounds and the display shows
negative mini notice.
If the message fails to send, the radio
returns you to the Resend option
screen. Press
to resend the
message to the same subscriber/group
alias or ID.
Note: Changing the volume, and
pressing any button, except for
, or
, returns you to the
message.
,
The radio exits the Resend option
screen if you press the PTT button to
initiate a Private or Group Call, or to
respond to a Group Call. The radio
also exits the screen when it receives
a text or telemetry message, an
emergency call or alarm, or a call
alert.
Steps
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
The display returns to the Resend
option screen if you press the PTT
button to respond to a Private Call
(except when the radio is displaying
the Missed Call screen), and at the
end of an All Call.
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
If you exit the message sending screen while the
message is being sent, the radio updates the
status of the message in the Sent Items folder
without providing any indication in the display or
via sound.
If the radio changes mode or powers down before
the status of the message in Sent Items is
updated, the radio cannot complete any InProgress messages and automatically marks it
with a Send Failed icon.
The radio supports a maximum of five (5) InProgress messages at one time. During this
period, the radio cannot send any new message
and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Option
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
select.
to Sent Items and press
to
When you select Sent Items and it contains no
text messages, the display shows List Empty,
and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned
on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
141).
113
English
3
or
select.
to Delete All and press
to
Reading a Text Message
4 Choose one of the following.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
the messageif the PTT button is pressed when the
radio is displaying the alert screen.
1
or
•
or
to Yes and press
to select. The
display shows positive mini notice.
•
or
to No and press
previous screen.
to return to the
Receiving a Text Message
When your radio receives a message, the display
shows the alias or ID of the sender and the Message
icon.
You can select one of the following options when
receiving a text message:
•
•
•
114
Read.
Read Later.
Delete.
Note: The radio exits the Text Message alert screen
and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of
English
to Read? and press
to select.
Selected message in the Inbox opens.
A subject line may be shown if the message is
from an e-mail application.
2 Do one of the following:
•
Press
to return to the Inbox.
•
Press
a second time to reply, forward, or
delete the text message.
Managing Received Text Messages
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The
Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30
messages.
Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to
the most recently received.
Your radio supports the following options for text
messages:
Reply
Forward
Delete
Delete All
5 Do one of the following:
•
Press
Note: Long press
Home screen.
at any time to return to the
2
to Inbox and press
or
to view the messages.
to return to the Home screen.
Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from
the Inbox
2
to access the menu.
or
Long press
to access the menu.
1
to Messages and press
•
1
Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox
or
to select the current message, and
press
again to reply, forward, or delete
that message.
Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or
Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a
match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all
Received messages.
to select.
3
4
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
•
•
•
A subject line may be shown if the message is
from an e-mail application.
to select.
or
to Messages and press
to select.
or
to Inbox and press
or
to the required message and press
3
4
to select.
to select.
115
English
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text
message.
3
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text
Message>.
to return to the Home screen.
4
Press
Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox
Radio Controls
Steps
•
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
•
Menu
1
A blinking cursor appears.
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
English
once more to access the sub-menu.
5 Do one of the following:
1 Access the Text Message feature.
116
to the required message and press
to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is
from an e-mail application.
5
Long press
or
to Inbox and press
to select.
or
or
select.
to Reply and press
to select.
to Quick Reply and press
6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.
7
Press
once message is composed.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is being sent.
to
3
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 108).
4
Press
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
5
or
to Delete and press
to select.
or
to Yes and press
to select.
The display shows positive mini notice and the
screen returns to the Inbox.
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
once more to access the sub-menu.
6
Radio Controls
2
to the required message and press
to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is
from an e-mail application.
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
or
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows positive mini notice.
to Inbox and press
to select.
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
117
English
Radio Controls
Steps
Menu
1
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
Job Tickets
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
to Inbox and press
to select.
Your radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which are
messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks that
need to be performed.
You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them
into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are
“All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with
your dealer or system administrator for an additional
10 folders.
When you select Inbox and it contains no text
messages, the display shows List Empty, and
sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
141).
Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets,
all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job
Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state
are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number
of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically
replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio.
or
select.
Note: Job Tickets are retained even after radio is
powered down and powered up again.
3
to Delete All and press
to
4
or
to Yes and press
to select.
The display shows positive mini notice.
Your radio will automatically detect and discard the
duplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line.
Accessing the Job Ticket Folder
Access the Job Ticket folder.
118
English
Steps
Programmed
Job Ticket
button
1 Press the programmed Job
Ticket button.
2
or
to the required
folder and press
select.
and the corresponding
number key (1–9) to access
the required folder.
4
or
to the required Job
Note: You can also press
Menu
1
2
3
to access the menu.
or
to Job Tickets
and press
to select.
or
to the required
folder and press
select.
to
Steps
Note: You can also press
to
and the corresponding
number key (1–9) to access
the required folder.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
Radio
Control
Ticket and press
select.
to
Logging In and Out of the Remote Server
This feature allows you to log in and log out of the
remote server by using your user ID via the menu.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Log In and press
to select.
If you are already logged in, menu displays Log
Out.
119
English
The display shows a transitional mini notice,
confirming that you have been logged in
successfully.
4 Depending on how your radio is configured, do
one of the following:
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If you have failed to log in, the display shows a
negative mini notice.
Creating and Sending a Job Ticket
Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which is
based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks
that need to be performed.
If
Then
If your radio is
configured with
one Job Ticket
template,
1 Use the keypad to type the
required room number and
2
If your radio is
configured with
more than one
Job Ticket
template,
to access the menu.
2
or
select.
to Create Ticket and press
to
English
or
to the required
option and press
select.
to
5
3
120
to
option and press
select.
1
to Job Tickets and press
to select.
to Room Status
and press
to select.
3
or
to the required
Note: A CPS programming software is required to
configure the Job Ticket template. Check with your
dealer or system administrator to determine how your
radio has been programmed.
or
select.
press
or
to
or
to Send and press
to select.
If the message is not sent, the display shows
negative mini notice.
1
to access the menu.
2
to Job Tickets and press
to
3
or
to the required folder and press
to
select.
You can also press the corresponding number key
(1–9) to access the required folder.
4
or
to the required Job Ticket and press
to select.
5
Press
or
to the required Job Ticket and press
to select.
You can also press the corresponding number key
(1–9) to respond to the job ticket.
Responding to the Job Ticket
or
select.
6
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
You can also press the corresponding number key
(1–9) to Quick Reply.
The display shows transitional mini notice,
confirming your message is sent.
once more to access the sub-menu.
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming
your message being sent.
If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display
shows positive mini notice.
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Deleting a Job Ticket
Delete a Job Ticket.
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
Job Ticket
button
1 Press the programmed Job
Ticket button.
121
English
Radio
Control
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
Steps
or
5
to All and press
again while
Press
viewing the Job Ticket.
6
or
to Delete and
to select.
Menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Job Tickets
3
and press
to select.
or
to All and press
4
to select.
or
to the required Job
Ticket and press
select.
to
Note: At Step 4, while
viewing the Job Ticket, press
to delete.
122
English
Steps
press
to select.
Note: You can also press
to delete.
Privacy
If enabled, this feature helps to prevent
eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel
by the use of a software-based scrambling solution.
The signaling and user identification portions of a
transmission are not scrambled.
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel
to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this
is not a necessary requirement for receiving a
transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,
•
Your radio supports two types of privacy:
•
•
•
Basic Privacy.
Enhanced Privacy.
Only one of the privacy types above can be assigned
to the radio.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data
transmission, your radio must be programmed to
have the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or the
same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy)
as the transmitting radio.
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a
different Privacy Key, or a different Key Value and
Key ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission
(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy).
Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacy
feature. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is
receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.
You can access this feature by performing one of the
following actions:
Pressing the programmed Privacy button to
toggle privacy on or off.
Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps
described next.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled)
transmissions.
to Privacy and press
You can also use
option.
or
to select.
to change selected
5
Press
to enable/disable Privacy.
The display shows
beside Enabled.
123
English
The
disappears from beside Enabled.
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature
allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an
interface to telephone systems.
1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMF
call.
2 Enter the desired number, * or #.
You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all
radio tones and alerts (see Turning the Radio
Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 145).
Multi-Site Controls
Starting an Automatic Site Search
Note: The radio only scans for a new site if the
current signal is weak or when the radio is unable to
detect any signal from the current site. If the RSSI
value is strong, the radio remains on the current site.
Start Automatic Site search by
Radio
Controls
Steps
Site Lock
On/Off
button
Press the programmed Site Lock
On/Off button to toggle the start/
stop automatic site search.
Radio
menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
These features are applicable when your current
radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Linked
Capacity Plus configuration.
3
press
or
See IP Site Connect on page 43 and Linked Capacity
Plus on page 44 for more details about these
configurations.
4
and press
to select.
or
to Site Roaming and
press
124
English
to select.
to Radio Settings
to select.
Stopping an Automatic Site Search
Steps
5
or
press
to Site Lock and
to select.
If the current channel is a multi-site channel with
an attached roam list and is out of range, the radio
also performs an automatic site search (site is
unlocked) during:
•
•
a PTT button press.
data transmission.
When your radio is actively searching for a new
site, you can stop the search by
Radio
Controls
Steps
Site Lock
On/Off
button
Press the programmed Site Lock
On/Off button to stop automatic site
search.
Radio
menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
press
or
to select.
to Radio Settings
A tone sounds and the display shows Site
Unlocked.
3
The radio then returns to the Home screen. The
display shows the Site Roaming icon and channel
alias.
and press
to select.
4
or
to Site Roaming and
The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is
actively searching for a new site, and turns off
once the radio locks on to a site.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Controls
5
press
or
to select.
to Site Lock and
press
to select.
125
English
A tone sounds and the display shows Site
Locked.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The radio then returns to the Home screen. The
LED turns off and the display shows the channel
alias.
Starting a Manual Site Search
Start a Manual Site Search by
Steps
Manual
Site Roam
button
Press the programmed Manual
Site Roam button to start the
manual site search.
Radio
menu
1
3
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
press
or
and press
126
English
Steps
4
or
press
5
or
and press
Radio
Controls
2
Radio
Controls
to select.
to Radio Settings
to select.
to Site Roaming and
to select.
to Active Search
to select.
A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site,
and the LED blinks green.
If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED
turns off. The display shows Site <Alias>
Found.
If there is no available site within range, a tone
sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows
Out of Range.
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable
to connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns
off. The display shows Channel Busy.
The radio returns to the Home screen.
You can enable or disable any radio in the system.
For example, you might want to disable a stolen
radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable
that radio, when it is recovered.
Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited
to radios with these functions enabled. Check with
your dealer or system administrator for more
information.
Radio
Controls
Steps
2
or
1 Access this feature by
Steps
Radio
Disable
button
1 Press the programmed Radio
Disable button.
2
or
to the required alias or
ID and press
Radio
menu
Select the required alias or ID
directly.
•
Radio
Controls
to select.
to Contacts and press
to select. The entries are
alphabetically sorted.
3 Use one of the steps described
next to select the required
subscriber alias or ID:
•
Radio Disable
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Security
•
or
to the required
alias or ID and press
to select.
Use the Manual Dial menu.
•
or
and press
to Manual Dial
to select.
1
to access the menu.
127
English
Radio
Controls
If not successful, the radio sounds a negative
indicator tone and the display shows negative mini
notice.
Steps
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
•
4
or
to Radio
Number and press
to
select.
The first line of the display
shows Radio Number: .
the second line of the
display shows a blinking
cursor. Use the keypad to
enter the subscriber alias
.
or ID and press
or
to Radio Disable
and press
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
English
Radio Enable
1 Access this feature by
Radio
Controls
Steps
Radio
Enable
button
1 Press the programmed Radio
Enable button.
2
or
to the required alias or
to select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber
Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.
128
Do not press
during the Radio Disable
operation as you will not get an acknowledgement
message.
If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator
tone and the display shows positive mini notice.
ID and press
Radio
menu
to select.
1
to access the menu.
Steps
Radio
Controls
2
or
Steps
•
to Contacts and press
to select. The entries are
alphabetically sorted.
3 Use one of the steps described
next to select the required
subscriber alias or ID
•
•
or
or
•
to the required
alias or ID and press
to select.
use the Manual Dial menu
•
or
and press
to Manual Dial
to select.
4
to Radio
Number and press
to
select.
The first line of the display
shows Radio Number: .
the second line of the
display shows a blinking
cursor. Use the keypad to
enter the subscriber alias
select the required alias or ID
directly
•
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Controls
or
.
or ID and press
to Radio Enable and
press
to select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber
Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator
tone and the display shows positive mini notice.
129
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
If not successful,the radio sounds a negative
indicator tone and the display shows negative mini
notice.
The radio remains in the emergency state allowing
voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See
Emergency Operation on page 96 on ways to exit
Emergency.
Do not press
during the Radio Enable
operation as you will not get an acknowledgement
message.
Note: This feature is limited to radios with this
function enabled. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
Lone Worker
This feature raises an emergency if there is no user
activity, such as any radio button press or activation
of the channel selector, for a predefined time.
Before raising the emergency, when the inactivity
timer expires, the radio warns the user via an audio
indicator.
If there is still no acknowledgement by the user
before the predefined reminder timer expires, the
radio initiates an Emergency Alarm.
Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can be
assigned to this feature:
130
•
•
•
English
Emergency Alarm.
Emergency Alarm with Call.
Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow.
Password Lock Features
If enabled, this feature only allows you access your
radio if the correct password is entered upon
powering up.
Accessing the Radio from Password
1 Power up your radio.
You hear a continuous tone.
2 Do one of the following: Enter your current fourdigit password. Press or
to edit each digit’s
numeric value. Each digit changes to . Press
to move to next digit. Press
selection.
to confirm your
•
Enter your current four-digit password with the
radio’s keypad. The second line of the display
Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks
yellow.
shows
. Press
to proceed.
Enter your current four-digit password. Press
or
to edit each digit’s numeric value.
Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes,
and responds to inputs from On/Off/Volume
Control Knob and programmed Backlight button
only.
Each digit changes to . Press
next digit. Press
to move to
to confirm your selection.
You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit
entered. Press to remove the last on the
display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you
press when the second line of the display is
empty, or if you press more than four digits.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
Note: The radio is unable to receive any call,
including emergency calls, in locked state.
Unlocking the Radio from Locked State
1 If your radio was powered down after being in the
locked state, power up the radio.
A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.
The display shows Radio Locked.
If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to
power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page
24.
2 Wait for 15 minutes.
Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked
state when you power up.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.
3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio from
Password on page 130.
After the third incorrect password, the display
shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio
131
English
Turning the Password Lock On or Off
7 If the password entered in the previous step is
1
correct, press
lock.
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
or
to Utilities and press
3
or
select.
The display shows
to select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
The
disappears from beside Enabled.
1
to access the menu.
or
select.
to Passwd Lock and press
to
6
Press
2
or
5 Enter the four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 130.
to proceed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the
previous menu.
English
beside Enabled.
Changing the Password
4
132
to enable/disable password
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Passwd Lock and press
to
4
to
5 Enter the four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 130.
to proceed.
Press
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the
previous menu.
7 If the password entered in the previous step is
correct,
to select.
or
to Change Pwd and press
8 Enter a new four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 130.
9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit
password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio
from Password on page 130.
10
Press
to proceed.
If the reentered password matches the new
password entered earlier, the display shows
Password Changed.
If the reentered password does NOT match the
new password entered earlier, the display shows
Passwords Do Not Match.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
6
The screen automatically returns to the previous
menu.
Bluetooth Operation
Note: If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related
features are disabled and the Bluetooth device
database is erased.
This feature allows you to use your radio with a
Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless
Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both
Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-TheShelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32
feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path
between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled
device.
It is not recommended that you leave your radio
behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to
work with a high degree of reliability when they are
separated.
133
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone
quality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. To
correct this problem, simply position your radio and
Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within
the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish
clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function
has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10meter/32 feet range.
Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous
Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled
devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a
scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple
connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the
same type are not supported.
Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s
user manual for more details on your Bluetoothenabled device’s full capabilities.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
to access the menu.
2
134
English
to Bluetooth and press
or
to My Status and press
to select.
The display shows On and Off. The current status
is indicated by a .
4 Do one of the following:
•
or
to On and press
to select. The
display shows On and a appears left of the
selected status.
•
or
to Off and press
to select. The
display shows Off and a appears left of the
selected status.
Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device
Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or
press
during the finding and connecting
operation as this cancels the operation.
1
or
3
to select.
1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place
it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetoothenabled device’s user manual.
On your radio, press
to access the menu.
3
or
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
to select.
4
to select.
5 Do one of the following:
•
•
or
to the required device and press
to select.
or
to Find Devices to locate available
devices.
or
to the required device and
press
to select.
6
or
to Connect and press
to select.
Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your
Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional
steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective
Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
If successful, the radio display shows <Device>
Connected. A tone sounds and appears besides
the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon
appears on the status bar.
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting
Failed.
Note: If pin code is required, use the same entry
method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from
Password on page 130.
Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode)
Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the
finding and connecting operation as this may cancel
the operation.
1 Turn Bluetooth On.
See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 134.
2
to access the menu.
3
or
to Bluetooth and press
to select.
135
English
4
5
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
or
to Find Me and press
to select.
Your radio can now be found by other Bluetoothenabled devices for a programmed duration. This
is called Discoverable Mode.
5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it
with your radio.
Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s
user manual.
Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device
1
On your radio, press
to access the menu.
2
or
to Bluetooth and press
to select.
or
to Disconnect and press
to
select.
Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require
additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective
Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.
The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A
positive indicator tone sounds and disappears
beside the connected device. The Bluetooth
Connected icon disappears on the status bar.
Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker
and Bluetooth Device
You can toggle audio routing between internal radio
speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
button.
3
or
to Devices and press
to select.
•
4
or
to the required device and press
to select.
136
English
•
A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio
to Radio.
A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio
to Bluetooth.
2
1
to access the menu.
to Bluetooth and press
to select.
to Devices and press
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
to select.
to select.
4
or
to the required device and press
to select.
3
or
or
3
2
or
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Viewing Device Details
to select.
5
4
or
or
to the required device and press
to select.
6
5
or
select.
to View Details and press
to
Editing Device Name
You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled
devices.
Press
to Edit Name and press
to select.
to move one space to the left. Press
move one space to the right. Press
to
to delete
any unwanted characters. Long press
to
change text entry method.
A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type
the required zone.
7 The display shows Device Name Saved.
1
to access the menu.
Deleting Device Name
You can remove a disconnected device from the list
of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
137
English
1
3
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
or
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
to select.
4
3
to select.
4
or
to the required device and press
to select.
5
or
to Delete and press
to select.
The display shows Device Deleted.
Bluetooth Mic Gain
Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled
device’s microphone gain value.
to access the menu.
2
138
English
to Bluetooth and press
to BT Mic Gain and press
or
values.
to the BT Mic Gain type and the current
To edit values, press
5
or
press
to
to select.
to increase or to decrease values and
to select.
Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode
Note: The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode
can only be enabled in MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled,
the Bluetooth item will not be displayed in the Menu
and you will not be able to use any Bluetooth
programmable button features.
Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your
radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. It
enables dedicated devices to use your radio position
in the process of Bluetooth-based location.
1
or
or
select.
to select.
Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your
“unread” events on the channel, such as unread text
messages, telemetry messages and missed calls.
Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notification
list.
The Notification icon appears on the status bar when
the Notification List has one or more events.
For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events,
the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missed
calls/call alerts. This maximum number depends on
individual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/
call alerts) list capability.
Note: After the events are read, they are removed
from the Notification List.
Accessing the Notification List
Long press
2
to
to the required event and press
to
to return to the Home Screen.
Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS)
ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to inform
you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTSequipped radios.
ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals
periodically to confirm that they are within range of
each other. Your dealer can program your radio to
transmit or receive the ARTS signal.
Your radio provides indications of states as follows:
•
to access the menu.
to Notification and press
or
select.
•
1
or
select.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3
Notification List
•
First-Time Alert – A tone sounds and the display
shows In Range after the channel alias.
ARTS-in-Range Alert – A tone sounds, if
programmed, and the display shows In Range
after the channel alias.
ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert – A tone sounds, the
LED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternates
between Out of Range and the home screen.
139
English
Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely,
via OTAP, without needing to be physically
connected. Additionally, some settings can also be
configured via OTAP.
update is successful or Sw Update Failed if the
OTAP update is unsuccessful.
See Software Update on page 173 for your updated
software version.
Utilities
While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green.
Note: When the radio is receiving high volume data,
the High Volume Data icon appears and channel is
busy. A PTT button press at this time may cause a
negative tone to sound.
Once the programming is complete, depending on
your radio’s configuration:
•
•
140
A tone sounds, the display shows Updating
Restarting, and your radio restarts (powers off
and on again).
Select between Restart Now or Postpone.
Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return to
the previous display, with an OTAP Timer icon
visible, for a period of time before the automatic
restart occurs.
Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, the
display shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP
English
Locking and Unlocking the Keypad
You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertent
key entry.
To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.
Option
Steps
Locking the 1
Keypad
2
3
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
press
or
and press
to select.
to Radio Settings
to select.
3
Steps
4
or
to Keypad Lock and
press
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Keypad Tones and press
to
4
to select.
You can also use or to change
the selected option.
Unlocking
the Keypad
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Option
5
Press
followed by
.
After the keypad is locked, the display shows
Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.
After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows
Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home
screen.
You can also use
option.
You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.
to change the selected
6
Press
to enable/disable keypad tones.
The display shows
Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
or
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Setting the Squelch Level
1
You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out
unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels
that have a higher than normal background noise.
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
141
English
Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)
calls and/or background noise; however, calls from
remote locations may also be filtered out.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle
squelch level between normal and tight. Follow the
procedure described next to access this feature via
the radio’s menus.
to access the menu.
2
to Utilities and press
You can customize your radio’s power setting to high
or low for each channel.
High enables communication with radios located at a
considerable distance from you. Low enables
communication with radios in closer proximity.
Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle
transmit power level between high and low. Follow
the procedure described next to access this feature
via the radio’s menus.
1
or
Setting the Power Level
to select.
1
to access the menu.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
4
or
2
to Squelch and press
to select.
142
English
to select.
3
or
select.
5
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
appears besides selected setting. Screen
returns to the previous menu.
to Utilities and press
to Radio Settings and press
4
or
to Power and press
to select.
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
5
3
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
appears beside selected setting. At any time,
or
select.
to Cable Type and press
You can also use
option.
Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off
A channel can support up to 6 option board features.
Refer to your dealer or system administrator for more
information.
Press the programmed Option Board Feature
button to toggle the feature on or off.
Identifying Cable Type
You can select the type of cable your radio uses.
1
to
or
to
to change the selected
5 The current cable type is indicated by a .
Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)
Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice
activated call on a programmed channel. The radio
automatically transmits, for a programmed period,
whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable
accessory detects voice.
Pressing the PTT button during radio operation will
disable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of the
following:
to access the menu.
2
to Utilities and press
to Radio Settings and press
4
long press
to return to the Home screen.
Screen returns to the previous menu.
or
or
select.
to select.
•
Turn the radio off and power it on again.
143
English
•
•
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
Change the channel via the Channel Selector
Knob.
Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the
feature on or off.
Follow the steps described next to access this
feature via the radio menu.
If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page
147), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for
the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly
into the microphone.
Note: Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios
with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or
system administrator for more information.
1
2
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
144
English
or
to VOX and press
You can also use
option.
or
to select.
to change the selected
5
Press
to disable/enable VOX.
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Setting the Display Backlight Timer
You can set the the radio’s display backlight timer as
needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation
Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly.
Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the
backlight settings, or follow the procedure described
next to access this feature via the radio menu.
to access the menu.
or
4
to Radio Settings and press
to
The display backlight and keypad backlighting are
automatically turned off if the LED indicator is
disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on
page 151).
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
1
1
to access the menu.
to access the menu.
2
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
select.
4
or
to Display and press
to select.
to Backlight Timer and press
You can use
option.
or
to
to Backlight Auto.
5
5
or
select.
or
to Radio Settings and press
to
to change the selected
Turning the Backlight Auto On or Off
You can enable and disable the radio’s backlight to
turn on automatically if needed. If enabled, the
backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call,
Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm.
Press
to enable/disable the Backlight Auto.
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if
needed.
Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to
toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure
described next to access this feature via the radio
menu.
145
English
alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice
volume.
1
to access the menu.
1
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
or
to Utilities and press
to access the menu.
to select.
2
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
to
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
to All Tones and press
to select.
Press
to enable/disable all tones and alerts.
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level
You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if
needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/
English
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
or
select.
to Vol. Offset and press
to
to
5
6
146
or
select.
4
5
or
to select.
3
4
or
select.
to Utilities and press
6
to
or
to the required volume value.
The radio sounds a feedback tone with each
corresponding volume value.
7 Do one of the following:
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
5
to keep the required displayed
Press
volume value.
or
select.
•
to Talk Permit and press
You can also use
option.
Press
to exit without changing the current
volume offset settings.
or
to
to change the selected
6
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off
Press
Tone.
You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if
needed.
to enable/disable the Talk Permit
The display shows
1
The
to access the menu.
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone
if needed.
1
to access the menu.
4
to
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
147
English
3
1
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
to access the menu.
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
4
to
3
5
or
to Power Up and press
You can also use
option.
or
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Setting the Text Message Alert Tone
You can customize your radio’s text message alert
tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the
Contacts list.
148
English
or
to the required subscriber alias or ID
to select.
or
to Message Alert and press
to
select.
The display shows Momentary and Repetitive.
to enable/disable the Power Up Alert
The display shows
to select.
4
6
Press
Tone.
to Contacts and press
and press
to select.
to change the selected
or
You can also use
option.
or
to change the selected
5
or
to the required setting and press
enable.
appears besides selected setting.
to
You can change radio’s display mode between Day
or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of
the display.
Radio
Control
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Changing the Display Mode
Steps
The display shows Day Mode
and Night Mode.
Change the Display Mode:
Note: You can also use
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
Display Mode
Button
Press the programmed Display
Mode button.
Menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
press
3
or
to select.
to Radio
Settings and press
to
select.
4
or
to Display and
press
or
to change the selected
option.
5
or
to the required
setting and press
to
enable. appears besides
selected setting.
Adjusting the Display Brightness
You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.
Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when
“Auto Brightness” is enabled.
Adjust the Display Brightness
to select.
149
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
Steps
Radio
Control
Programmed
Display
Brightness
Button
1 Press the programmed
Brightness button.
2 Decrease display brightness
4
. Select from setting of 1 to
English
to confirm your
Language
to select.
to Radio
Settings and press
select.
150
8. Press
entry.
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
press
3
or
to select.
by pressing or increase the
display brightness by pressing
to confirm your
1
2
to Brightness and
The display shows a progress
bar.
5 Decrease display brightness
. Select from setting of 1 to
Menu
or
press
by pressing or increase the
display brightness by pressing
8. Press
entry.
Steps
You can set your radio display to be in your required
language.
to
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to LED Indicator and press
to
4
or
to Languages and press
You can also use
option.
5
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
or
or
to select.
to change selected
You can also use
option.
to the required language and press
to enable.
language.
Press
to access the menu.
to enable/disable the LED Indicator.
The display shows
Turning the LED Indicator On or Off
1
to change the selected
5
appears beside selected
You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if
needed.
or
to
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if
needed.
1
to access the menu.
151
English
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
to Display and press
to select.
or
select.
to Intro Screen and press
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
6
Press
Screen.
to enable/disable the Introduction
The display shows
The
Radio Control
Steps
Programmed
Press the programmed Voice
Voice
Announcement button.
Announcement
Button
Menu
1
2
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off
Note: The Voice Announcement feature can only be
enabled in MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled, the Text-to-
English
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
current Zone or Channel the user has assigned, or
programmable button press. This audio indicator can
be customized per customer requirements. This is
typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition
to read the content shown on the display.
Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off.
5
152
Speech feature is automatically disabled, and vice
versa.
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities
and press
to select.
Radio Control
Steps
3
or
to select.
Note: You can also use
or to change the selected
option.
5 Do one of the following:
•
Press
to enable
Voice Announcement.
The display shows
beside Enabled.
•
to disable
Press
Voice Announcement.
Steps
The disappears from
beside Enabled.
to Radio
Settings and press
to
select.
4
or
to Voice
Announcement and press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio Control
Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature
Note: The Text-to-Speech feature can only be
enabled in MOTOTRBO Customer Programming
Software. If enabled, the Voice Announcement
feature is automatically disabled, and vice versa.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
following features:
•
•
•
•
•
Current Channel.
Current Zone.
Programmed button feature on or off.
Content of received text messages.
Content of received Job Tickets.
This audio indicator can be customized per customer
requirements. This is typically useful when the user is
in a difficult condition to read the content shown on
the display.
153
English
•
1
to access the menu.
If enabled, the display shows
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
or
select.
4
or
to Radio Settings and press
to
to Voice Announcement and press
to select.
5
or
press
disappears from beside Enabled.
•
•
•
•
•
You can enable your radio to automatically forward
voice calls to another radio.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to any of the following features and
All
Messages
Job Tickets
Channel
Zone
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
to select.
You can also use
option.
English
If disabled, the
beside Enabled.
Call Forwarding
3
154
Program Button
or
to change the selected
or
select.
to Call Forward and press
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
4 Do one of the following:
•
to enable Call Forwarding. The
Press
display shows beside Enabled.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
6
to disable Call Forwarding. The
Press
disappears from beside Enabled.
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
Menu Timer
Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)
Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu
before it automatically switches to the Home screen.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on an analog system.
It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a
preset value in order to provide a consistent level of
audio.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
4
or
to Display and press
or
select.
to select.
5
or
select.
to Menu Timer and press
to Radio Settings and press
You can also use
option.
to
or
to
to change the selected
4
or
to Mic AGC-A and press
to select.
155
English
5 Do one of the following:
You can also use
option.
•
Press
shows
to enable Mic AGC-A. The display
beside Enabled.
or
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
1
to access the menu.
2
to select.
3
or
select.
156
English
to Radio Settings and press
to select.
•
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It
suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a
preset value in order to provide a consistent level of
audio.
to Utilities and press
to Mic AGC-D and press
5 Do one of the following:
Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)
or
to change the selected
4
•
Press
to disable Mic AGC-A. The
disappears from beside Enabled.
or
to
Press
shows
to enable Mic AGC-D. The display
beside Enabled.
•
Press
to disable Mic AGC-D. The
disappears from beside Enabled.
Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker
and Wired Accessory
You can toggle audio routing between the internal
radio speaker and the speaker of wired accessory
provided that:
•
•
The wired accessory with speaker is attached.
The audio is not routed to an external Bluetoothenabled accessory.
Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory
resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.
Radio
Control
Steps
2
or
Intelligent Audio
Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume
to overcome background noise in the environment,
inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise
sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and
does not affect Transmit audio.
Note: This feature is not applicable during a
Bluetooth session.
Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off.
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
Intelligent
Audio Button
Press the programmed
Intelligent Audio button.
Menu
1
to Radio
Settings and press
select.
3
or
to Radio
to
Settings and press
to
select.
4
or
to Intelligent
Audio and press
select.
to
or
Note: You can also use
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Press the programmed Audio Toggle button to
toggle audio routing between the internal radio
speaker and the speaker of wired accessory.
to change the selected
option.
5 Do one of the following:
•
to enable
Press
Intelligent Audio. The
157
English
Radio
Control
Steps
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
display shows
Enabled.
beside
•
Press
to disable
Intelligent Audio. The
disappears from beside
Enabled.
See Authorized Accessories List on page 287 for
recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories
with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar
performance.
Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On
or Off
This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback
in received calls.
Toggle the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor
Feature On or Off by performing one of the
following actions:
158
English
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
Acoustic
Feedback
Suppressor
Button
Press the programmed Acoustic
Feedback Suppressor button.
Menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and
press
3
or
to select.
to Radio
Settings and press
to
select.
4
or
to AF Suppressor
and press
to select.
Note: You can also use
to change the selected
option.
or
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
2
Steps
or
5 Do one of the following:
or
select.
Press
to enable
Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor. The display
shows beside Enabled.
Press
to disable
Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor. The
disappears from beside
Enabled.
to Radio Settings and press
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
4
or
select.
to Mic Distortion and press
to
5 Do one of the following:
•
to enable Microphone Dynamic
Press
Distortion Control. The display shows beside
Enabled.
Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control
Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to enable the radio to
automatically monitor the microphone input and
adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio
clipping.
to select.
3
•
•
to Utilities and press
•
Press
to disable Microphone Dynamic
Distortion Control. The disappears from
beside Enabled.
1
to access the menu.
159
English
Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off
Setting the Audio Ambience
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
You can enable this feature when you are speaking in
a language that contains many words with alveolar
trill (rolling “R”) pronunciations. Press the
programmed Trill Enhancement On/Off button to
toggle trill enhancement on or off.
1
2
to Utilities and press
Default enables the default factory settings.
Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increases
speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings.
Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disables
AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each
other.
to access the menu.
or
You can customize your radio’s audio ambience
according to your environment.
to select.
1
to access the menu.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Trill Enhance and press
to
or
4
to
3
to enable/disable Trill Enhancement.
4
5
Press
The display shows
The
160
English
2
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
to Utilities and press
to select.
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
select.
to Audio Ambience and press
to
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
5
2
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
You can also use or to change the selected
option.
appears beside selected setting.
Screen returns to the previous menu.
or
Default disables the previously selected audio
profile and the radio’s audio profile returns to normal.
Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profiles
intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing
loss that is typical for adults in their 40’s, 50’s, and
60’s or over.
Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are for
a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper
sound.
1
to access the menu.
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
select.
to Audio Profiles and press
to
4
Setting the Audio Profiles
You can customize your radio’s audio profiles
according to your preference.
to Utilities and press
5
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
You can also use or to change the selected
option.
appears beside selected setting.
Screen returns to the previous menu.
Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On or Off
GPS is a satellite navigation system that determines
the radio’s precise location. Press the programmed
GPS button to toggle the feature on or off.
161
English
•
•
1
to access the menu.
Your radio supports the following text entry methods:
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
to GPS and press
to select.
5
Press
to enable/disable GPS.
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
See Checking the GPS Information on page 172 for
details on retrieving GPS information.
Text Entry Configuration
You can configure the following settings for entering
text on your radio:
162
•
•
English
Sentence Cap
My Words
Word Predict
Word Correct
•
•
•
•
Numbers
Symbols
Predictive or Multi-Tap
Language (If programmed)
Note: Press
at any time to return to the previous
screen or long press
to return to the Home
Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the
inactivity timer expires.
Word Predict
Your radio can learn common word sequences that
you often enter. It then predicts the next word you
may want to use after you enter the first word of a
common word sequence into the text editor.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
3
1
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
or
select.
to Word Predict and press
to
to access the menu.
2
4
or
to
or
to
•
to enable Word Predict. The display
beside Enabled.
•
Press
to disable Word Predict. The
disappears from beside Enabled.
Sentence Cap
Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter
in the first word for every new sentence.
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
or
select.
to Sentence Cap and press
to
4
to change the selected
6 Do one of the following:
Press
shows
to select.
3
5
You can also use
option.
to Utilities and press
to
5
to
6 Do one of the following:
•
Press
to enable Sentence Cap. The
display shows beside Enabled.
•
Press
to disable Sentence Cap. The
disappears from beside Enabled.
163
English
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Viewing Custom Words
Editing Custom Word
You can add your own custom words into your radio’s
in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to
contain these words.
You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.
1
to access the menu.
2
to access the menu.
or
2
or
1
to Utilities and press
to select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
to My Words and press
to select.
or
to List of Words and press
select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
English
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
or
6
164
to Radio Settings and press
to
to
5
5
or
or
select.
4
4
to
to select.
3
3
or
select.
to Utilities and press
to
to My Words and press
to select.
6
or
to List of Words and press
select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
to
or
select.
to the required word and press
to
8
or
to Edit and press
to move one space to the left. Press
the
to access the menu.
2
to change text entry
If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
to select.
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
4
once your custom word is
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming
your custom word is being saved.
to Utilities and press
3
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method. Press
completed.
or
or
key to move one space to the right.
Press the
You can add your own custom words into your radio’s
in-built dictionary.
1
to select.
9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
Press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Adding Custom Word
7
to
5
or
to My Words and press
to select.
6
or
to Add New Word and press
select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
to
165
English
Press
to move one space to the left. Press
3
key to move one space to the right.
the
Press the
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
or
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method. Press
completed.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.
or
select.
to access the menu.
English
to
or
to Delete and press
to select.
•
At Delete Entry?, press
to select Yes.
The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
2
166
to the required word and press
7
1
to Utilities and press
to select.
8 Choose one of the following.
Deleting a Custom Word
or
to My Words and press
6
If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
to
5
or
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming
your custom word is being saved.
to
4
to change text entry
once your custom word is
or
select.
to select.
or
to No and press
previous screen.
to return to the
You can delete all custom words from your radio’s inbuilt.
to select Yes.
At Delete Entry?, press
The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
or
to No and press
previous screen.
1
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
Deleting All Custom Words
to return to the
Flexible Receive List
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
4
to
5
or
to My Words and press
to select.
6
Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currently
supported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus)
feature that allows you to add, delete or edit members
on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a
maximum of 16 members in the list.
Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off
You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive List
if needed.
Enable the Flexible Receive List by performing
one of the following actions:
Radio Control
or
select.
to Delete All and press
7 Choose one of the following.
to
Steps
Programmed
Press the programmed
Flexible Receive Flexible Receive List button.
List Button
167
English
Radio Control
Steps
Menu
1
or
to access the menu.
or
to Flexible Rx
2
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
2
List and press
select.
to
Previous
display
Current display
Turn On
Flexible Rx List On
Turn Off
Flexible Rx List Off
Adding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List
1
to access the menu.
168
English
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
to Flexible Rx List and press
to select.
3
Press
to enable or
disable the Flexible
Receive List feature.
to Utilities and press
5
or
select.
to View/Edit List and press
or
select.
to Add Member and press
to
6
to
7 Select the required alias or ID by performing one
of the following actions:
Radio
Control
Radio
Navigation
Buttons
Steps
or
ID.
to the required alias or
Steps
Keypad
Key in the first character of the
required alias.
to select.
Press
The display shows Add Another?.
9
or
to No and press
The display shows .
A blinking cursor appears.
Press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
8
Radio
Control
to move one space to the
left. Press
to move one space to
key to
the right. Press the
delete any unwanted characters.
Long press
to change the
text entry method.
The first line of the display shows
the characters you keyed in. The
next lines of the display show the
short listed search results. The
alias search is case-insensitive. If
there are two or more aliases with
the same name, the radio displays
the alias that is listed first in the list.
to select
Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
to Flexible Rx List and press
to select.
5
or
select.
to View/Edit List and press
to
169
English
6 Select the required alias or ID by performing one
of the following actions:
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Control
Radio
Navigation
Buttons
Keypad
Steps
or
to the required alias or
Key in the first character of the
required alias.
Press
to move one space to the
left. Press
Long press
to change the
text entry method.
The first line of the display shows
the characters you keyed in. The
next lines of the display show the
short listed search results. The
English
7
Press
to select.
8
or
to Delete and press
to select.
9
to move one space to
key to
the right. Press the
delete any unwanted characters.
Steps
alias search is case-insensitive. If
there are two or more aliases with
the same name, the radio displays
the alias that is listed first in the list.
ID.
A blinking cursor appears.
170
Radio
Control
or
to Yes and press
The display shows .
to select.
Accessing General Radio Information
Your radio contains information on the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Battery
Radio Alias and ID
Firmware and Codeplug Versions
GPS Information
Software Update
For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads
Recondition Battery if the battery requires
reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the
reconditioning process, the display then shows the
battery information.
Site Information
Press
at any time to return to the previous
screen or long press
to return to the Home
screen. The radio exits the current screen once the
inactivity timer expires.
Accessing the Battery Information
1
to access the menu.
This feature displays the ID of your radio.
Follow the procedure described next to access this
feature via the radio screen.
2
to Utilities and press
Checking the Radio Alias and ID
Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to
check your radio alias and ID. You hear a positive
indicator tone.
Displays information on your radio battery.
or
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
•
to select.
1
to access the menu.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
or
select.
to Battery Info and press
2
to
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
4
The display shows the battery information.
or
select.
to
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
to My ID and press
to select.
171
English
The first line of the display shows the radio alias.
The second line of the display shows the radio ID.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and
ID button to return to the previous screen.
Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version
Displays the firmware version on your radio.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
Checking the GPS Information
Displays the GPS information on your radio, such as
values of:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Direction
Velocity
Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
Satellites
Version
1
to access the menu.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
to Versions and press
to select.
The display shows the current firmware and
codeplug versions.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
172
English
to GPS Info and press
to select.
or
to the required item and press
select.
The display shows the requested GPS
information.
to
See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 140
for details on OTAP session.
Site Information
See Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On
or Off on page 161 for details on GPS.
Software Update
Displays the date and time of the latest software
update carried out via Over-the-Air Programming.
Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site name
your radio is on.
1
to access the menu.
Note: Software Update menu is only available after at
least one successful OTAP session.
2
1
3
or
or
select.
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
to SW Update and press
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
The display shows the date and time of the latest
software update.
5
to select.
to Utilities and press
to Radio Info and press
to select.
to
4
or
to Site Info and press
to select.
The display shows the current Linked Capacity
Plus site name.
See Linked Capacity Plus on page 44 for details on
Linked Capacity Plus.
173
English
Front Panel Configuration (FPC)
•
– Short-press to return to previous menu or
to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return
to Home screen.
Your radio is able to customize certain feature
parameters to enhance the use of your radio.
Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode
Entering FPC Mode
Checking the RSSI Values
1
Your radio shows the Received Signal Strength
Indicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. This
feature allows you to view the RSSI values.
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Program Radio and press
Long press
screen.
to
at any time to return to the Home
Editing FPC Mode Parameters
Use the following buttons as required while navigating
through the feature parameters:
•
,
– Scroll through options, increase/
decrease values, or navigate vertically.
•
174
English
– Select the option or enter a sub-menu.
On the home screen, press
three times and
immediately press , all within 5 seconds.
The display shows current RSSI values. Long
press the
to return to the Home Screen.
See Display Icons on page 35 for details on RSSI
icon.
Connect Plus Operations
Connect Plus Operations
175
English
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Additional Radio Controls in Connect
Plus Mode
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button
The PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) serves
two basic purposes:
•
While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is
used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call
on page 191).
If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit
Tone On or Off on page 147) is enabled, wait until the
short alert tone ends before talking.
Programmable Buttons
Your dealer can program the programmable buttons
as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the
duration of a button press:
A
•
•
•
•
While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows
the radio to transmit to other radios in the call.
Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release
the PTT button to listen.
176
English
The microphone is activated when the PTT button
is pressed.
Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.
Long press – Pressing and holding for the
programmed duration.
Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.
Note: The programmed duration of a button press is
applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or
settings. See Emergency Operation on page 218 for
more information on the programmed duration of the
Emergency button.
Assignable Radio Functions
Beacon On/Off
Toggles the Beacon feature on
or off. Requires purchase of
Intelligent Audio
Beacon Reset
Resets (cancels) the Beacon
tone, but it does not turn the
Beacon feature off. Requires
purchase of Connect Plus Man
Down feature.
Man Down Alarms Toggles all configured Man
On/Off
Down Alarms on or off.
Requires purchase of Connect
Plus Man Down feature.
Bluetooth® Audio
Switch
Toggles audio routing between
internal radio speaker and
external Bluetooth-enabled
accessory.
Busy Queue
Cancellation
Exits the busy mode when a
non-Emergency call in the
Busy Queue was initiated.
Emergency calls, once
accepted into the Busy Queue,
cannot be cancelled.
Call Log
Selects the call log list.
Contacts
Provides direct access to the
Contacts list.
Emergency On/Off Depending on the
programming, initiates or
cancels an emergency.
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Connect Plus Man Down
feature.
Toggles intelligent audio on or
off.
Man Down Alarms If pressed while a Man Down
Reset
feature Alert Tone is playing,
the tone is cancelled and
feature timers are reset, but it
does not turn the Man Down
Alarms off. Requires purchase
of Man Down feature.
Manual Dial
Depending on the
programming, initiates a
Private or Phone Call by
keying in any subscriber ID or
phone number.
One Touch
Access
Directly initiates a predefined
Private Call, a Call Alert or a
Quick Text message.
Privacy
Toggles privacy on or off.
177
English
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Radio Check
Determines if a radio is active
in a system.
Radio Enable
Allows a target radio to be
remotely enabled.
Radio Disable
Allows a target radio to be
remotely disabled.
Remote Monitor
Turns on the microphone of a
target radio without it giving
any indicators.
English
Voice
Announcement
On/Off
Toggles voice announcement
on or off.
Zone
Allows selection from a list of
zones.
Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
Roam Request
Requests to search for a
different site.
AF Suppressor
Toggles the Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor feature on or off.
Scan
Toggles scan on or off.
All Tones/Alerts
Site Lock On/Off
When toggled on, the radio
searches the current site only.
When toggled off, the radio
searches other sites in addition
to the current site.
Toggles all tones and alerts on
or off.
Backlight
Toggles display backlight on or
off.
Backlight
Brightness
Adjusts the brightness level.
Display Mode
Toggles the day/night display
mode on or off.
Text Message
178
channel. This function is
unavailable when Voice
Announcement is disabled.
Selects the text message
menu.
Voice
Plays zone and channel
Announcement for announcement voice
Channel
messages for the current
Toggles the satellite navigation
system on or off.
Keypad Lock
Toggles keypad between
locked and unlocked.
Power Level
Toggles transmit power level
between high and low.
Unassigned
Indicates that the button
function has not yet been
assigned.
Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI)
The number of bars displayed
represents the radio signal strength.
Four bars indicate the strongest signal.
This icon is only displayed while
receiving.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but
there is no remote Bluetooth device
connected.
Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus
Mode
Bluetooth Connected
Display Icons
The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The
icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth
device is connected.
The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display
(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,
and menu entries.
The following are icons that appear on the radio’s
display. Icons are displayed on the status bar,
arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and
are channel specific.
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Global
Positioning
System (GPS)
Notification List has items to review.
or
Power Level
179
English
Radio is set at Low power or Radio is
set at High power.
Emergency
Radio is in Emergency mode.
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Tones Disable
Secure
Tones are turned off.
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Option Board
Unsecure
The Option Board is enabled.
The Privacy feature is disabled.
Option Board Non-Function
Site Roaming
The Option Board is disabled.
The site roaming feature is enabled.
GPS Available
Battery
The GPS feature is enabled. The icon
stays lit when a position fix is available.
The number of bars (0 – 4) shown
indicates the charge remaining in the
battery. Blinks when the battery is low.
GPS Not Available/Out of Range
The GPS feature is enabled but is not
receiving data from the satellite.
Scan
Scan feature is enabled.
180
English
Call Icons
The following icons appear on the radio’s display
during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts
list to indicate ID type.
Indicates a Private Call in progress. In
the Contacts list, it indicates a
subscriber alias (name) or ID
(number).
Group Call/Site All Call
Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call
in progress. In the Contacts list, it
indicates a group alias (name) or ID
(number).
Advanced Menu Icons
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Private Call
The following icons appear beside menu items that
offer a choice between two options or as an indication
that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
Checkbox (Empty)
Indicates the option is not selected.
Checkbox (Checked)
Indicates the option is selected.
Solid Black Box
Phone Call as Private Call
Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call
in progress.
Dispatch Call
The Dispatch Call contact type is used
to send a text message to a
dispatcher PC through a third-party
Text Message Server.
Indicates the option selected for the menu
item with a sub-menu.
Sent Item Icons
The following icons appear at the top right corner of
the radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.
181
English
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
OR
Sent Successfully
Bluetooth Audio Device
The text message is sent successfully.
Bluetooth-enabled audio device,
such as a headset.
Bluetooth PTT Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such
as a PTT-Only Device (POD).
In-Progress
OR
•
•
The text message to a group alias or ID
is pending transmission.
The text message to a subscriber alias
or ID is pending transmission, followed
by waiting for acknowledgement.
LED Indicator
The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status of
your radio.
Bluetooth Device Icons
The following icons also appear next to items in the
list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate
the device type.
Bluetooth Data Device
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such
as a scanner.
182
English
A
Rapidly
blinking red
Blinking
green and
yellow
Radio is receiving over-the-air file
transfer (Option Board firmware file,
Network Frequency file or Option
Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to
a new Option Board firmware file.
Solid green
Radio is powering up or transmitting.
Blinking
green
Radio is powering up, receiving a
non-privacy- enabled call or data.
Double
blinking
green
Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled
call.
Indicator Tones
High pitched tone
Double
blinking
yellow
Radio is actively searching for a new
site.
Blinking
yellow
Radio is receiving a Call Alert or
Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will
remain muted to any activity).
Low pitched tone
Positive Indicator Tone
Radio is receiving a Call Alert,
received a text message or Scan is
enabled and is receiving activity.
Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable
Mode.
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery
condition, receiving an emergency
transmission or has failed the selftest upon powering up, or has
moved out of range if radio is
configured with Auto-Range
Transponder System.
Negative Indicator Tone
Audio Tones
Audio tones provide you with audible indications of
the status, or response to data received on the radio.
Continuous Tone
A monotone sound.
Sounds continuously
until termination.
183
English
Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode
Periodic Tone
Sounds periodically
depending on the
duration set by the radio.
Tone starts, stops, and
repeats itself.
Repetitive Tone
A single tone that
repeats itself until it is
terminated by the user.
Momentary Tone
Sounds only once for a
short period of time
defined by the radio.
Switching Between Connect Plus and NonConnect Plus Modes
To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must
change to another zone, if programmed by your
dealer or system administrator. Check with your
dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has
been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and
what features are available while operating in nonConnect Plus zones.
184
English
Selecting a Site
A site provides coverage for a specific area. A
Connect Plus site has a site controller and a
maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the
Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new
site when the signal level from the current site drops
to an unacceptable level.
Press the programmed Roam Request button.
You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched
to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site
Number>.
Site Lock On/Off
When toggled on, the radio searches the current site
only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites
in addition to the current site.
Press the programmed Site Lock button.
•
Roam Request
A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a
different site, even if the signal from the current site is
acceptable.
If there are no sites available,
•
•
The radio display shows Searching and
continues to search through the list of sites.
The radio will return to the previous site, if the
previous site is still available.
Note: This is programmed by your dealer.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect
Plus Mode
•
You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating
the radio has locked to the current site. The
display shows Site Locked.
You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating
the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site
Unlocked.
Site Restriction
Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the
ability to decide which network sites your radio is and
is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be
reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and
disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a
disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:
185
English
Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio
then searches for a different network site.
Radio Controls
2
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
Selecting a Zone
Each assignable knob position can be used to start
one of the following voice call types:
Group Call
Multigroup Call
Site All Call
Private Call
to select.
2 Select the required zone.
Radio Control Steps
or
and scroll to the
required zone.
3
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Zone button
Press the programmed Zone
button.
Radio menu
1
to access the menu.
English
to Zone and
The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
.
or
1 Access the Zone feature by performing one of the
following actions:
186
or
press
The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16
Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone
contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on
the Channel Selector Knob.
•
•
•
•
Steps
Press
to select.
The display shows <Zone> Selected
momentarily and returns to the selected zone
screen.
Using Multiple Networks
If your radio has been programmed to use multiple
Connect Plus networks, you can select a different
network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
assigned to the desired network. These network-tozone assignments are configured by your dealer
through radio programming.
Selecting a Call Type
Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type.
This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All
Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is
programmed. If you change the Channel Selector
Knob to a different position (that has a call type
assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register
with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with
the Registration Group ID that has been programmed
for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.
If you select a position that has no call type assigned
to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the
display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not
operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel,
use the Channel Selector Knob to select a
programmed channel instead.
Once the required zone is displayed (if you have
multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed
Channel Selector Knob to select the call type.
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call
Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is
displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to
calls.
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
transmitting and blinks green when the radio is
receiving.
Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
transmitting and double blinks green when the radio
is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a
187
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same
Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID
(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting
radio (the radio you are receiving the call from).
Note: See Privacy on page 242 for more information.
Receiving and Responding to a Group Call
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio
must be configured as part of that group.
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home
screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line
shows the caller alias. The second text line displays
the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the
incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
The LED lights up solid green.
2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if
enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.
3 Release the PTT button to listen.
188
English
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period
of time, the call ends.
Note: See Making a Group Call on page 191 for
details on making a Group Call.
Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to
another individual radio.
When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks
green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your
radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through
the radio's speaker.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
The LED lights up solid green.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
Note: See Making a Site All Call on page 193 for
details on making a Site All Call.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
Ended.
Note: The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you
switch to a different channel while receiving the call.
During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any
programmed button functions until the call ends.
See Making a Private Call on page 192 for details on
making a Private Call.
Receiving a Site All Call
A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to
every radio on the site. It is used to make important
announcements requiring the user’s full attention.
Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call
When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the
Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top
right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.
When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and
the LED blinks green.
1 Press and hold down PTT button to answer and
talk. Release the PTT button to listen.
The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.
The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays Site All Call. Your radio
unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the
radio speaker.
2
Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the
previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All
Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time
before ending.
You cannot respond to an Site All Call.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period
of time, the call ends.
to end the call.
Long press
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
The display returns to the Phone Call screen.
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
189
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone
Private Call
Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone
Private Call
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
the display shows Phone Call.
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
the display shows Phone Call.
1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the
1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter
the digits.
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the
top right corner. The first text line of the display
shows the Live Dial digits.
button.
followed by
within 2 seconds to
Press
insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the
display.
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the
top right corner. The first text line of the display
shows the entered digits.
2
Long press
to end the call.
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
The display returns to the Phone Call screen.
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
190
English
2
Long press
to end the call.
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
The display returns to the Phone Call screen.
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call
When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call,
the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.
The first text line shows Call1.
Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call
When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group
Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call.
The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call
sounds through the radio's speaker.
Making a Radio Call
After selecting your channel, you can select a
subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
•
•
•
The Channel Selector Knob.
A programmed One Touch Access button – The
One Touch Access feature allows you to make a
Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature
can be assigned to a short or long programmable
button press. You can ONLY have one ID
assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your
radio can have multiple One Touch Access
buttons programmed.
The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page
210).
•
Manual Dial – This method is for Private Calls only
and is dialed using the keypad (see Making a
Private Call from Contacts on page 211, and
Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial
Button on page 194).
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
Press the PTT button to talk and release it to
listen.
Note: Your radio must have the Privacy feature
enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled
transmission. Only target radios with the same Key
Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to
unscramble the transmission.
Note: See Privacy on page 242 for more information.
Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob
Making a Group Call
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must
be configured as part of that group.
1 Select the channel with the active group alias or
ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 187.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
191
English
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the group call alias.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green, the radio unmutes and the response
sounds through the radio’s speaker. You see the
Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and
transmitting radio alias or ID on your display.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the
screen you were on prior to initiating the call.
Making a Private Call
192
Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to
contact an individual radio. See Text Message
Features on page 229 or Call Alert Operation on
page 94 for more information.
1 Do one of the following.
•
•
Select the channel with the active subscriber
alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page
187.
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
icon appears on the top right corner. The first text
line shows the target subscriber alias. The second
text line displays the call status.
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private
Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your
radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private
Call.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you
make a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log,
One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector
Knob, if this feature is not enabled.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
English
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
and see negative mini notice on the display.
Making a Site All Call
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the
site that are currently not engaged in another call.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use
this feature.
Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site
All Call.
1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call
group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page
187.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows Site All Call.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. You hear a short
tone. The display shows Call Ended.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
Making a Multi-group Call
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on
multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to
allow you to use this feature.
Note: Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multigroup Call.
1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the
Multi-group alias or ID.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the Multi-group alias or ID.
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
193
English
Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiated
from the Home screen.
The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily
make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias
or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long
programmable button press.
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a
One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple
One Touch Call buttons programmed.
1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to
make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call
alias or ID.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green.
The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
194
English
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial
Button
Making a Private Call
1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to
enter into the Manual Dial screen.
The display shows Number:.
2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or
Private ID.
3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
4 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call
icon appears in the top right corner. The first text
line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends. You hear a short
tone. The display shows Call Ended.
If an invalid telephone number is selected, the
display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call
Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid
Permissions.
If
is pressed with no telephone number
entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone
then a negative indicator tone. The display
remains the same.
Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the
Programmable Manual Dial Button
1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to
enter into the Manual Dial screen.
The display shows Number:.
3
Long press
to end the call.
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and
press
to place a call to the entered number.
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
Press
to delete any unwanted characters. Press
Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone
Menu
followed by
within 2 seconds to insert
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
If successful, the first line of the display shows
Phone Call. The second line of the display shows
the dialed telephone number.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
1
to access the menu.
195
English
2
or
to Phone and press
is pressed with no telephone number
If
entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone
then a negative indicator tone. The display
remains the same.
to select.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
3
Press
to select Manual Dial.
The first line of the display shows Number, the
second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
5
Long press
4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and
press
to end the call.
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
to place a call to the entered number.
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
Press
to delete any unwanted characters. Press
followed by
within 2 seconds to insert
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the display shows
Phone Call. The second line of the display shows
the dialed telephone number.
If an invalid telephone number is selected, the
display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call
Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid
Permissions.
196
English
Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts
Note: If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in
MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the
Phone Number item will not be displayed in the
Menu.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Contacts and press
to select.
or
select.
to Manual Dial and press
is pressed with no telephone number
If
entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone
then a negative indicator tone. The display
remains the same.
to
4
or
to Phone Number and press
to
select.
The first line of the display shows Number, the
second line of the display shows a blinking cursor.
5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
3
6
Long press
to end the call.
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
press
to place a call to the entered number.
If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a
negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and
returns to the previous screen.
Press
to delete any unwanted characters. Press
followed by
within 2 seconds to insert
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
If successful, the first line of the display shows
Phone Call. The second line of the display shows
the dialed telephone number.
Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private
Phone Call
When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of
the display shows Phone Call. The second line of
the display shows the dialed telephone number.
When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private
Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line
of the display shows the telephone number.
If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini
notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not
Available, or Invalid Permissions.
197
English
Long press
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the
top right corner. The first text line of the display
shows the telephone number with the over-dial
digits appended.
to end the call.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
The display returns to the previous screen.
Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound
Private Phone Call
3 Do one of the following.
•
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
the display shows the telephone number.
1 Use the keypad to enter the digits.
Press
to delete any unwanted characters. Press
followed by
within 2 seconds to insert
a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.
The first text line of the display shows Extra
Digits, the second text line of the display shows
the entered extra digits.
2
Press the
button.
If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a
negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and
returns to the previous screen.
198
English
Press
to return to the Phone Call screen.
•
Long press
to end the call.
Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound
Private Phone Call
During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon
appears in the top right corner. The first text line of
the display shows the telephone number.
1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter
the digits.
The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the
top right corner. The first text line of the display
shows the telephone number with the over-dial
digits appended.
2
Long press
to end the call.
Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode
The first line of the display shows Ending. The
second line of the display shows Phone Call....
The display shows Phone Call Ended.
199
English
Advanced Features in Connect Plus
Mode
Auto Fallback
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to
continue to make and receive non-emergency calls
on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain
types of Connect Plus system failures.
If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to
roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search
process may result in your radio finding an operable
Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding
a “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for Auto
Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is
normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is
currently unable to communicate with either its site
controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback
mode, the repeater operates as a single digital
repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports nonemergency Group Calls only. No other call types are
supported in Fallback Mode.
200
English
Indications of Auto Fallback Mode
When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you
hear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximately
once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting).
The display periodically shows a brief message,
“Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT on
the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup
Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make
other types of calls.
Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode
Note: Calls are heard only by radios that are
monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected
to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other
sites or other repeaters.
Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not
available in Fallback mode. If you press the
emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio
provides an invalid key press tone. Display-equipped
radios also show the message, “Feature not
available”.
Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not
available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a
private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this
Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not
supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio
users press PTT at the same time (or at almost the
same time), it is possible that both radios transmit
until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that
none of the transmissions will be understood by
receiving radios.
Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal
functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish
to use (using the radio’s normal channel selection
method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It
is possible that the channel may be in use already by
another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a
busy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”.
You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call
contacts using your radio’s normal channel selection
method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback
Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other
Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently
selected to the same Multi-group.
Returning to Normal Operation
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
point you should select a desired group contact.
Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor,
Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio
Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and
packet data calls.
If the site returns to normal trunking operation while
you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio
automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a
registration “beep” when the radio successfully
registers. If you are in the range of an operable site
(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the
Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio)
to force your radio to search for and register on an
available site. If no other site is available, your radio
returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is
complete. If you drive out of coverage of your
Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode
(display indicates “Searching”).
Radio Check
If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if
another radio is active in a system without disturbing
the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification
is shown on the target radio.
This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases
or IDs.
Sending a Radio Check
1 Access the Radio Check feature.
201
English
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the
request is in progress. The LED lights up solid
green.
Radio
Control
Steps
Programmed
Radio Check
button
1 Press the programmed Radio
Check button.
2
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
press
Menu
to select.
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and
press
to select.
3
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
press
4
or
and press
202
English
to select.
to Radio Check
to select.
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If the target radio is active in the system, a tone
sounds and the display briefly shows Target
Radio Available.
If the target radio is not active in the system, a
tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target
Radio Not Available.
Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen
when initiated via Menu.
Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via
the programmable button.
Remote Monitor
Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the
microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs
only). The green LED will blink once on the target
subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,
remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target
radio.
Initiating Remote Monitor
Radio
Control
Steps
3
Note: Remote Monitor automatically stops after a
programmed duration or when there is any attempt to
initiate transmission, change channels or power down
the radio.
Steps
Programmed
Remote
Monitor
Button
1 Press the programmed
Remote Monitor button.
2
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
5
press
Menu
to select.
to select.
to Manual Dial
and press
to select.
or
to Remote Mon.
and press
to select.
The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The
second text line displays the Target Alias,
indicating the request is in progress. The LED
lights up blinking green.
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
1
2
or
to the required
subscriber alias or ID and
press
4
or
1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.
Radio
Control
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use
this feature.
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and
press
to select.
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor
Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from
the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by
203
English
target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio
sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative
indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor
Failed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Scan
This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls
for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list.
When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the
status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.
Starting and Stopping Scan
Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On or
Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network
ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to
note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via
this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some
(or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan
List on page 206 for more information.
You can start and stop scanning by pressing the
programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure
described next.
204
English
1
to access the menu.
2
3
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Turn On or Turn Off and press
to select.
•
•
•
•
The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.
The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is
enabled.
The display shows Scan Off if scan is
disabled.
The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is
disabled.
Responding to a Transmission During a Scan
During scanning, your radio stops on a group where
activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for
any member in the scan list when idle on the control
channel.
1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
If you do not respond within the hang time, the
radio returns to scanning other groups.
User Configurable Scan
If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add
and Remove the scan members from the Add
Member menu. A Scan List member must be a
regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All
Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned
to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus
Zone with the same Network ID as the currently
selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match
any Talkgroup that has been included in the current
Zone's Scan List.
Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by
pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.
This feature functions only when the radio is not
currently involved in a call. If you are presently
listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other
group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in
progress. Once your call is finished, your radio
returns to the control channel time slot and is able to
scan for groups that are in the scan list.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2 Press the PTT button during hang time.
The LED lights up solid green.
Turning Scan On or Off
Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On or
Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your
currently selected zone. It is important to note that
even when the Scan feature is turned on via this
procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all)
groups on your scan list. See the next section for
more information.
If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your
display. When Scan is on and you are not
participating in a call, the LED blinks green and
yellow.
The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on
how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a
Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the
feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed
205
English
so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu,
follow the procedure described next.
1
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2
3
or
to Scan and press
to select.
or
to Turn On or Turn Off and press
to select.
•
•
The display shows Scan On momentarily if
scan is disabled.
The display shows Scan Off momentarily if
scan is enabled.
Editing the Scan List
206
Note: If the scan list entry happens to be the radio’s
currently selected group, the radio listens for activity
on this group regardless of whether the list entry
currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a
radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its
Selected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its
Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for
English
one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is
enabled the radio will also listen for activity on
enabled Zone Scan List members.
Your scan list determines which groups can be
scanned. The list is created when your radio is
programmed. If your radio has been programmed to
allow you to edit the scan list, you can,
•
•
Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the
list.
Add and Remove the scan members from the Add
Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via
the Add Members Menu on page 207.
Note: A Scan List member must be a regular Group
Contact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/Network
Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel
Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the
same Network ID as the currently selected Zone.
The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup
that has been included in the current Zone's Scan
List.
1
to access the menu.
or
select.
3
or
to View/Edit List and press
to
to the desired Group name.
If a check mark precedes the Group name, then
scan is currently enabled for this Group.
If there is no check mark preceding the Group
name, then scan is currently disabled for this
Group.
4
to select the desired Group.
The display shows Enable if scan is currently
disabled for the Group.
The display shows Disable if scan is currently
enabled for the Group.
5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable)
and press
to select.
Depending on which option was selected, the
radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan
Disabled as confirmation.
The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan
was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays
before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the
Group, the check mark is removed before the Group
name.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2
Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members
Menu
The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate
group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed
on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scan
candidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates”
described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes after
adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list.
If your radio has been programmed to allow you to
edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members
menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently
selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list of
the currently selected zone.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Scan option and press
to select.
207
English
groups on the list are called “scan candidates”,
because they can be added to the scan list of your
currently selected zone (or they are already on the
zone scan list).
3
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
to <Add Members> and press
to
select.
The display shows “Add Members from Zone n” (n
= the Connect Plus zone number of the first
Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same
Network ID as your currently selected zone).
4 Do one of the following.
•
•
5
or
to scroll a list of Connect Plus zones
that have the same Network ID as the currently
selected zone.
position, press
English
7
If the group you want to add to the scan list is
assigned to a channel selector position in that
zone, go to step 6.
If the group you want to add to the scan list is
assigned to a channel selector position in a
different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.
6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the
desired group is assigned to a channel selector
208
If the zone does not have any groups that can be
added to the scan list, the radio displays No
Candidates.
to select.
Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups
assigned to a channel position in that zone. The
or
groups.
to scroll through the list of candidate
If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before
the group alias, this indicates the group is
currently on the scan list for the selected zone.
If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately
before the alias, the group is not currently on the
scan list, but can be added.
8
when the desired group alias is
Press
displayed.
If this group is not currently on the scan list for the
currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)
message is displayed.
9
to accept the displayed message (Add
Press
or Delete).
If deleting a group from the list, you will know the
operation is successful because the plus sign (+)
will no longer display immediately before the alias.
If adding a group to the list, you will know the
operation is successful because the plus sign (+)
will display before the alias.
If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is
already full, the radio displays List Full. If this
should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group
from the scan list prior to adding a new one.
10
as many times as
When finished, press
necessary to return to the desired menu.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
If this group is already on the scan list for the
currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)
message is displayed.
Understanding Scan Operation
Note: If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List
member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer
expires before you are able to respond, in order to
respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel
of the Scan List Member and start a new call.
There are some circumstances in which you can miss
calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you
miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does
not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a
normal scan operation for Connect Plus.
•
•
•
•
Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan
icon on the display).
Scan list member has been disabled via the menu
(see Editing the Scan List on page 206).
You are participating in a call already.
No member of the scanned group is registered at
your site (Multisite systems only).
Scan Talkback
If your radio scans into a call from the selectable
group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed
during the scanned call, the operation of the radio
209
English
depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or
disabled during radio programming. For more
information on how your radio is programmed,
contact your radio dealer (or your radio system
administrator).
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Scan
Talkback
Disabled
Scan
Talkback
Enabled
210
The radio leaves the scanned call and
attempts to transmit on the contact for
the currently selected channel
position. After the Call Hang Time on
the currently selected contact expires,
the radio returns to the home channel
and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer.
The radio resumes group scan after its
Scan Hang Time Timer expires.
If the PTT button is pressed during the
Group Hang Time of the scanned call,
the radio attempts to transmit to the
scanned group.
Note: If you scan into a call for a group that is not
assigned to a channel position in the currently
selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the
call, switch to the proper zone and then select the
channel position of the group to talk back to that
group.
English
Contacts Settings
Note: You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect
Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be
performed by your dealer.
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you
can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that
channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy
Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your
radio are able to unscramble the transmission.
Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on your
radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that
you use to initiate a call.
Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100
contacts. The following contact types are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Private Call
Group Call
Multigroup Call
Site All Call Voice
Site All Call Text
Dispatch Call
Making a Private Call from Contacts
to access the menu.
2
to select.
3 Use one of the steps described next to select the
required subscriber alias:
•
Select the subscriber alias directly.
•
•
or
to the required subscriber alias or
ID.
Use the Manual Dial menu.
•
•
edit/enter the ID. Press
to select.
4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
1
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text
message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party
Text Message Server.
or
to Manual Dial and press
to select.
If there was previously dialed subscriber
alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along
5 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the destination alias.
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green and the display shows the transmitting
user's ID.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
You hear a short tone. The display shows Call
Ended.
211
English
Making a Call Alias Search
When the target radio responds, the LED blinks
green.
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to
retrieve the required subscriber alias.
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined
period of time, the call ends.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.
The display shows Call Ended.
1
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
to access the menu.
Adding a New Contact
2
1
or
to Contacts and press
The entries are alphabetically sorted.
to select.
3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and
then press
or
to locate the required alias.
4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
212
to access the menu.
2
or
to Contacts and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to New Contact and press
to
5 Press the PTT button to make the call.
The LED lights up solid green. The display shows
the destination alias.
4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),
and speak clearly into the microphone.
5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
English
press
press
to confirm.
to confirm.
or
5
to the
required ringer type and press
to select.
The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the
display shows Contact Saved.
to Call Ringers and press
or
select.
to Call Alert and press
The current tone is indicated by a
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert
to
to
.
7
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a
received Call Alert.
or
select.
1
to the required tone and press
to
appears beside selected tone.
to access the menu.
2
to Utilities and press
or
select.
6
Call Indicator Settings
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
6 If adding a Radio Contact,
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alert and press
to
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
Calls
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
Private Call.
1
to access the menu.
4
to
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
213
English
3
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
to
or
select.
to Private Call and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
4
to
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Call Ringers and press
to
or
to Text Message and press
select.
The current tone is indicated by a .
to
5
6
6
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
Message
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received
Text Message.
1
2
or
to Utilities and press
7
or
to the required tone and press
select.
appears beside selected tone.
to
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
to access the menu.
English
to Radio Settings and press
4
5
214
or
select.
to select.
You can program your radio to continually alert you
when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done
Call Log Features
4
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,
answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log
feature to view and manage recent calls.
1
•
•
2
to access the menu.
or
Viewing Recent Calls
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Call Log and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to preferred list and press
or
to view the list.
Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with
the current selected alias or ID.
Deleting a Call from a Call List
You can perform the following tasks in each of your
call lists:
Delete
View Details
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
The display shows the most recent entry at the top
of the list.
by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume
over time. This feature is known as Escalert.
to Call Log and press
to select.
3
or
to the required list and press
to
select.
When you select a call list and it contains no
entries, the display shows List Empty, and
sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
141).
to
215
English
4
or
to the required alias or ID and press
4
to select.
5
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
to Delete and press
to select.
6 Do one of the following:
•
Press
to select Yes to delete the entry.
The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
or
to No, and press the
return to the previous screen.
button to
or
to View Details and press
select.
Display shows details.
to
Call Alert Operation
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio
user to call you back when they are able to do so.
This feature is accessible through the menu via
Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch
Access button.
Viewing Details from a Call List
Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Call Log and press
to select.
3
English
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
5
216
or
or
select.
to the required list and press
to
When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the
notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of
the calling radio on the display.
When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED
blinks yellow, do one of the following:
Press the PTT button while the display still
shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to
respond with a Private Call.
•
use the Manual Dial menu
•
•
Press
to exit the Notification List. The alert
is moved to the Missed Call Log.
•
See Notification List on page 255 for details about
the Notification List.
See Call Log Features on page 215 for details
about the Missed Call List.
Making a Call Alert from the Contact List
to access the menu.
2
to Contacts and press
to select.
3 Use one of the steps described next to select the
required subscriber alias or ID:
•
select the subscriber alias directly
•
or
and press
to the required subscriber alias
to select.
or
to Manual Dial and press
to select.
The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be
displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and
press
.
4
or
select.
to Call Alert and press
to
The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber
Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber
alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been
sent.
1
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
sending the Call Alert.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the
display shows Call Alert Successful.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,
the display shows Call Alert Failed.
217
English
Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.
The display shows Call Alert and the
subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert
has been sent.
The LED lights up solid green when your radio is
sending the Call Alert.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the
display shows Call Alert Successful.
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,
the display shows Call Alert Failed.
Emergency Operation
218
Note: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or
“Silent with voice” emergency initiation, in most cases
it automatically exits silent operation after the
Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The
exception to this rule is when “Emergency Alert” is the
configured Emergency Mode and “Silent” is the
configured Emergency Type. If your radio is
programmed in this manner, the silent operation
continues until you cancel silent operation by
English
pressing PTT or the button configured for
“Emergency Off”.
Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not
supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto
Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto
Fallback on page 200.
An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical
situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time
on any screen display, even when there is activity on
the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button
initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The
programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated
by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The
Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio.
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for
the programmed Emergency button, except for long
press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75
seconds.
Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75
seconds.
•
•
If the short press for the Emergency button is
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the
long press for the Emergency button is assigned
to exit the Emergency mode.
If the long press for the Emergency button is
assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the
short press for the Emergency button is assigned
to exit the Emergency mode.
When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone,
it supports three Emergency modes:
•
•
•
Emergency Call – You must press the PTT button
to talk on the assigned emergency time slot.
Emergency Call with Voice to Follow – For the
first transmission on the assigned emergency time
slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and
you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The
microphone stays “hot” in this fashion for a time
period programmed into the radio. For subsequent
transmissions in the same Emergency call, you
must press the PTT button.
Emergency Alert – An Emergency Alert is not a
voice call. It is an emergency notification that is
sent to radios that are configured to receive these
alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via the
control channel of the currently registered site.
The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the
Connect Plus network that are programmed to
receive them (no matter which network site they
are registered to).
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
The Emergency button is assigned with the
Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for
the assigned operation of the Emergency button.
Only ONE of the Emergency Modes can be assigned
to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each
Emergency mode has the following types:
•
•
•
Regular – Radio initiates an Emergency and
shows audio and/or visual indicators.
Silent – Radio initiates an Emergency without any
audio or visual indicators. The radio will suppress
all audio or visual indications of the Emergency
until you press the PTT button to start a voice
transmission.
Silent with Voice – The same as Silent operation,
except that the radio will also unmute for some
voice transmissions.
Receiving an Incoming Emergency
Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert
tone and also display information about the incoming
Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the
219
English
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
incoming Emergency, the display shows the
Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon,
the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the
Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the
Emergency, and one additional line of information.
The additional information is the name of the zone
that contains the Group Contact.
At the present time, the radio displays only the most
recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is
received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the
details for the new Emergency replace the details of
the previous Emergency.
Depending on how your radio has been programmed,
the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen)
will stay on your radio’s display even after the
Emergency ends. You can save the emergency
details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the
emergency details as described in the following
sections.
Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List
Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows
you to view the details again at a later time by
selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.
220
English
1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List)
screen is displayed, press
.
The Exit Alarm List screen displays.
2 Perform one of the following actions:
•
Select Yes and press
to save the
emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit
the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
•
to return to the
Select No and press
Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.
Deleting the Emergency Details
1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,
press
.
The Delete screen displays.
2 Perform one of the following actions:
•
Select Yes and press
emergency details.
to delete the
to return to the
Select No and press
Emergency Details screen.
Responding to an Emergency Call
Note: If you do not respond to the Emergency Call
within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang
Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to
speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang
Time expires, you must first select the channel
position assigned to the group (if not already
selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency
Call to the group.
1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any
button to stop all Emergency Call received
indications.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice
transmission on the Emergency group.
All radios that are monitoring this group hear your
transmission.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)
and speak clearly into the microphone.
The LED lights up green.
5 Release the PTT button to listen.
When the emergency initiating radio responds, the
LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,
the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your
display.
Responding to an Emergency Alert
Note: The Group contact used for the Emergency
Alert should not be used for voice communication.
This could prevent other radios from sending and
receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group.
An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the
user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the
alert by initiating a private call to the radio who
declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a
designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert,
initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The
proper response is determined by your organization
and the individual situation.
221
English
Initiating an Emergency Call
Note: If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display
any audio or visual indicators during Emergency
mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice
transmission.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not
initially display any audio or visual indicators that the
radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio
unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to
your emergency. The emergency indicators only
appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a
voice transmission from your radio.
For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice” operation, the
radio automatically exits silent operation after the
Emergency Call is finished.
1 Press the programmed Emergency button.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice
transmission on the Emergency group.
222
English
When you release the PTT button, the Emergency
call continues for the time allotted for the
Emergency Call Hang Time.
If you press the PTT button during this time, the
Emergency call continues.
Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow
Your radio must be programmed for this type of
operation.
When enabled for this operation, when you press the
programmed Emergency button, and when your
radio receives the time slot assignment, the
microphone is automatically activated without
pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone
state is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” applies
to the first voice transmission from your radio during
the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in
the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT
button.
1 Press the programmed Emergency button.
2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0
cm) from your mouth.
4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than
the programmed duration.
Initiating an Emergency Alert
Note: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or
“Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audio or
visual indications that it is sending an Emergency
Alert. If programmed for “Silent”, the silent operation
continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the
button configured for “Emergency Off”. If programmed
for “Silent with Voice”, the radio automatically cancels
silent operation when the site controller broadcasts
the Emergency Alert.
Press the orange Emergency button.
Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site
controller, the radio’s display shows the
Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the
Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm.
Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent
and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a
positive indicator tone sounds and the radio’s
display shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert
is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds
and the radio displays Alarm Failed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
3 The microphone remains active for the “hot mic”
time specified in your radio's codeplug
programming.
During this time, the LED lights up green.
Exiting Emergency Mode
Note: If the Emergency call ends due to the
expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the
emergency condition is not over, press the
Emergency button again to restart the process.
If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the
programmed Emergency button, your radio
automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a
response from the Connect Plus system.
If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the
programmed Emergency button, your radio will be
assigned a channel automatically when one becomes
available. Once your radio has transmitted a
message indicating the emergency, you cannot
cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed
the button by accident or the emergency no longer
exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned
channel. When you release the PTT button, the
223
English
Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency
Call Hang Time expires.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice
to Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain your
error, then press and release the PTT button to
discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is
discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time
expires.
Man Down Alarms
Note: Man Down Alarms are not supported when
operating in Fallback mode. For more information see
the Auto Fallback on page 200.
This section describes the Connect Plus Man Down
Feature. This is a purchasable feature that may or
may not apply to your radio.
Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled and
programmed for one or more of the Man Down
Alarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator can
tell you whether or not this applies to your radio and
which specific Man Down Alarms have been enabled
and programmed.
224
If your radio has been programmed for one or more of
the following Man Down Alarms, it is important for you
English
to understand how the Alarm works, what indication
(tones) your radio provides, and the action you should
take.
The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alert
others when you might be in danger. This is
accomplished by programming your radio to detect a
certain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement,
depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/are
enabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movement
type, and if the condition is not corrected in a certain
period of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (if
so programmed). At this point you should immediately
take one or more of the corrective actions discussed
below, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/
have been enabled for your radio. If you do not take
corrective action within a certain period of time, your
radio automatically starts an Emergency (either an
Emergency Call or Emergency Alert).
•
Tilt Alarm – When your radio is tilted at or beyond
a specified angle for a period of time, it plays an
Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the
radio from automatically starting an Emergency
Call or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to the
vertical position immediately.
•
Anti-Movement Alarm – When your radio is
motionless for a period of time, it plays an Alert
Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio
from automatically starting an Emergency Call or
Emergency Alert, move the radio immediately.
Movement Alarm – When your radio is in motion
for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so
programmed). To prevent the radio from
automatically starting an Emergency Call or
Emergency Alert, stop the radio’s motion
immediately.
Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you
which of the above alarms (if any) has been enabled
through radio programming. It is possible to enable
both the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case,
the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the first
movement violation.
Instead of taking the corrective actions discussed
above, you can also prevent the radio from starting
the Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using a
programmable button, if your radio has been
configured in this manner. This is discussed in the
next two sections.
Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms On
and Off depends on how your radio is programmed. If
programmed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button,
use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On
and Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarms
enabled for your radio.
When using the programmable button to toggle the
Man Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone that
rises in pitch and displays a brief confirmation
message.
When using the programmable button to toggle the
Man Down Alarms Off, your radio plays a tone that
falls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.
In order to hear the tones described above when
turning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, the
MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Board
must both be enabled for keypad tones.
If your radio has been programmed so that Man
Down Alarms can be turned On and Off via the menu,
follow the procedure below.
1
to access the menu.
225
English
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Connect Plus and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
4
or
select.
to Man Down Alarm and press
to
If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, the
Enable option is shown.
When using the programmable button to reset the
Man Down Alarms, the radio shows a brief
confirmation message.
or
to Enable or Disable and press
to select.
If your radio has been programmed so that Man
Down Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow the
procedure below.
Resetting the Man Down Alarms
If your radio has been programmed with either a Man
Down Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarms
menu option, it is possible to reset the Man Down
Alarms without turning them On or Off. This stops any
Man Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and it
English
The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarms
depends on how your radio is programmed. If
programmed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button,
use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. This
applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for
your radio.
If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, the
Disable option is shown.
5
226
also resets the Alarm timers. However, it is still
necessary to correct the movement violation by taking
the appropriate corrective action described in the Man
Down Alarms section. If the movement violation is not
corrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone starts
playing again.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
or
select.
to Connect Plus and press
or
select.
to Man Down Alarm and press
to
4
to
5
or
to Reset and press
to select.
The radio displays a brief confirmation message.
Beacon Feature
This section describes the Beacon feature. The
Beacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, a
purchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio System
Administrator can tell you if the Beacon feature
applies to your radio.
If your radio has been enabled and programmed for
one or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also be
enabled for the Beacon feature.
If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Call
or Emergency Alert due to one of the Man Down
Alarms, and if your radio is also enabled for the
Beacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit a
high pitched tone approximately once every ten
seconds. The interval can vary depending on whether
you are talking on your radio. The purpose of the
Beacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If your
radio has also been enabled for the “Visual Beacon”,
the radio’s backlight comes on for a few seconds
every time the Beacon tone plays.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
3
You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon tone
by using a programmable button, if your radio has
been configured in this manner. This is discussed in
the next two sections. If your radio does not have the
programmable button or menu option, you can stop
the Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then on
again, or by changing to a different zone (if your radio
has been programmed for more than one zone).
Turning Beacon On and Off
The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Off
depends on how your radio is programmed. If
programmed with a Beacon On/Off button, use the
button to toggle the Beacon On and Off.
•
When using the programmable button to toggle
the Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that rises
in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.
227
English
•
When using the programmable button to toggle
the Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls in
pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
In order to hear the tones described above when
turning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBO
radio and Connect Plus Option Board must both be
enabled for keypad tones. If your radio has been
programmed so that the Beacon can be turned On
and Off via the menu, follow the procedure below.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Connect Plus and press
to
4
or
to Beacon and press
to select.
If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable option
is shown.
228
English
If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable option
is shown.
5
or
to Enable or Disable and press
to select.
The radio shows a brief message to confirm that
Man Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).
Resetting the Beacon
If your radio has been programmed with either the
Beacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, it
is possible to reset the Beacon. This stops the
Beacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) without
turning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure for
resetting the Beacon depends on how your radio is
programmed. If programmed with a Beacon Reset
button, use the button to Reset the Beacon. When
using the programmable button to reset the Man
Down Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmation
message. If your radio has been programmed so that
the Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow the
procedure below.
1
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Connect Plus and press
to
at any time to return to the
Note: Long press
Home screen.
Writing and Sending a Text Message
1 Access the Text Message feature.
Radio
Controls
4
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2
to Beacon and press
to select.
Programm Press the programmed Text
ed Text
Message button.
Message
button
5
or
to Reset and press
to select.
The radio displays a brief confirmation message.
Menu
Text Message Features
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text
message, from another radio or a text message
application.
The maximum length of characters for a text
message is 140.
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity
timer expires.
Steps
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages and
press
to select.
2
or
to Compose and press
A blinking cursor appears.
to select.
3 Use the keypad to type your message.
229
English
Press
to move one space to the left. Press
key to move one space to the right.
the
Press the
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
to change text entry
4
Press
once message is composed.
5 If you are sending the message, select the
recipient by
•
or
to the required alias and press
to select.
•
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows
Number:. The second line of the display shows
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
ID and press
230
English
.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 233).
Sending a Quick Text Message
Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text
messages as programmed by your dealer.
While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can
edit each message before sending it.
If you are sending the message, select the
recipient by
•
or
to the required alias and press
to select.
•
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows
Number:. The second line of the display shows
ID and press
.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 233).
Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
Access Button
Press the programmed One Touch Access
button to send a predefined Quick Text message
to a predefined alias.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display
shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you
to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-toSend Text Messages on page 233).
Accessing the Drafts Folder
You can save a text message to send it at a later
time.
If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the
radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen
while you are in the process of writing or editing a text
message, your current text message is automatically
saved to the Drafts folder.
The most recent saved text message is always added
to the top of the Drafts list.
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last
saved messages. When the folder is full, the next
saved text message automatically replaces the oldest
text message in the folder.
Note: Long press
Home screen.
at any time to return to the
231
English
Viewing a Saved Text Message
2
or
to Edit and press
A blinking cursor appears.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
1 Access the Text Message feature.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
2
Press
to select.
or
to Drafts and press
to select.
or
to the required message and press
1
232
English
again while viewing the message.
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
method.
to change text entry
4
once message is composed.
5 Select the message recipient by
•
or
to the required alias and press
to select.
to select.
Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message
or
key to move one space to the right.
Press
Press
to move one space to the left. Press
Press the
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
2
3
3 Use the keypad to type your message.
the
and press
to select.
•
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows
Number:. The second line of the display shows
ID and press
Radio Controls
.
Steps
2
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
2
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
3
If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to
the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send
Failed icon.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
to access the menu.
to Messages
to select.
or
to Drafts and press
to select.
or
to the required message and press
to select.
4
or
to Delete and press
text message.
Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts
1 Access the Text Message feature.
or
and press
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
to delete the
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages
You can select one of the following options while at
the Resend option screen:
•
•
•
Resend.
Forward.
Edit.
233
English
Resending a Text Message
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
ID and press
Press
to resend the same message to the
same subscriber/group alias or ID.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows the positive mini notice.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows
the negative mini notice.
Forwarding a Text Message
Select Forward to send the message to another
subscriber/group alias or ID.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
Editing a Text Message
Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.
1
1
or
to Forward and press
to select.
2 Select the message recipient by
•
or
to the required alias or ID and press
or
to Edit and press
A blinking cursor appears.
•
English
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows
Number:. The second line of the display shows
to select.
2 Use the keypad to edit your message.
Press
to select.
234
.
to move one space to the left. Press
the
Press the
key to move one space to the right.
key to delete any unwanted
or
to change text entry
•
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
characters. Long press
method.
to the required alias or ID and press
to select.
•
3
Press
once message is composed.
4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, reedit, or delete the newly composed message, do
one of the following.
or
to Manual Dial, and press
to
select. The first line of the display shows
Number:. The second line of the display shows
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or
ID and press
•
or
to Send, and press
message.
to send the
or
to Save, and press
message to the Drafts folder.
to save the
•
•
to edit the message.
•
again to choose between deleting the
message or saving it to the Drafts folder.
5 If you are sending the message, select the
recipient by
.
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
Managing Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved
in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is
always added to the top of the Sent Items list.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a
maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the
235
English
folder is full, the next sent text message automatically
replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
3
or
to the required message and press
to select.
Note: Long press
Home screen.
at any time to return to the
The icon at the top right corner of the screen
indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item
Icons on page 181).
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Viewing a Sent Text Message
Sending a Sent Text Message
1 Access the Text Message feature.
Radio
Controls
Steps
You can select one of the following options while
viewing a sent text message:
Programm Press the programmed Text
ed Text
Message button.
Message
button
Menu
•
•
•
•
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages and
1
2
press
to select.
Resend
Forward
Edit
Delete
Press
again while viewing the message.
or
to one of the following options and
press
2
236
English
or
select.
to Sent Items and press
to
to select.
Option
Steps
Forward
Select Forward to send the selected
text message to another subscriber/
Steps
Option
Steps
group alias or ID (see Forwarding a
Text Message on page 234).
If the message fails to send, the
radio returns you to the Resend
Edit
Select Edit to edit the selected text
message before sending it (see
Editing a Text Message on page
234).
option screen. Press
to resend
the message to the same
subscriber/group alias or ID.
Delete
Select Delete to delete the text
message.
Resend
Select Resend to resend the
selected text message to the same
subscriber/group alias or ID.
The display shows Sending
Message, confirming that the same
message is being sent to the same
target radio.
If the message is sent successfully,
a tone sounds and the display
shows Message Sent.
If the message cannot be sent, a
low tone sounds and the display
shows Message Send Failed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Option
Note: If you exit the message
sending screen while the message
is being sent, the radio updates the
status of the message in the Sent
Items folder without providing any
indication in the display or via
sound.
Note: If the radio changes mode or
powers down before the status of
the message in Sent Items is
updated, the radio cannot complete
any In- Progress messages and
automatically marks it with a Send
Failed icon.
Note: The radio supports a
maximum of five (5) In-Progress
237
English
Steps
Radio Controls
Steps
messages at one time. During this
period, the radio cannot send any
new message and automatically
marks it with a Send Failed icon.
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Option
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
238
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
If you exit the message sending screen while the
message is being sent, the radio updates the
status of the message in the Sent Items folder
without providing any indication in the display or
via sound.
If the radio changes mode or powers down before
the status of the message in Sent Items is
updated, the radio cannot complete any InProgress messages and automatically marks it
with a Send Failed icon.
The radio supports a maximum of five (5) InProgress messages at one time. During this
period, the radio cannot send any new message
and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
English
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
select.
to Sent Items and press
to
When you select Sent Items and it contains no
text messages, the display shows List Empty,
and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned
on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
141).
3
or
select.
to Delete All and press
4 Choose one of the following.
to
•
or
to Yes and press
to select. The
display shows positive mini notice.
Press
Managing Received Text Messages
When your radio receives a message, the display
shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the
sender and the Message icon.
You can select one of the following options when
receiving a text message:
Read.
Read Later.
Delete.
1
to Read? and press
to select.
Selected message in the Inbox opens.
2 Do one of the following:
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The
Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30
messages.
Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to
the most recently received.
Your radio supports the following options for text
messages:
•
•
•
•
Reading a Text Message
or
Press
a second time to reply, forward, or
delete the text message.
to return to the
Receiving a Text Message
•
•
•
to return to the Inbox.
•
•
or
to No and press
previous screen.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
Reply
Forward
Delete
Delete All
Note: If the channel type is not a match, you can only
forward, delete, or delete all Received messages.
Long press
screen.
at any time to return to the Home
239
English
Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox
Radio
Controls
1
to access the menu.
Programm Press the programmed Text
ed Text
Message button.
Message
button
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2
or
to Messages and press
or
to Inbox and press
to select.
Menu
3
4
or
Steps
to select.
1
2
toview the messages.
press
5 Do one of the following:
•
Press
to select the current message, and
again to reply, forward, or delete
press
that message.
3
or
to Inbox and press
to select.
or
to the required message and press
to select.
Long press
to return to the Home screen.
Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox
1 Access the Text Message feature.
English
to select.
2
•
240
to access the menu.
or
to Messages and
4
Press
once more to access the sub-menu.
5 Do one of the following:
or
to Reply and press
to select.
•
or
select.
to Quick Reply and press
to
A blinking cursor appears.
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.
2
7
Press
The display shows Sending Message, confirming
your message is being sent.
2
If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds
and the display shows Message Sent.
3
If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds
and the display shows Message Send Failed.
If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns
you to the Resend option screen (see Managing
Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 233).
to select.
or
to Inbox and press
to select.
or
to the required message and press
to select.
4
Press
once more to access the sub-menu.
5
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
once message is composed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
or
to Delete and press
or
to Yes and press
to select.
6
to select.
241
English
The display shows Message Deleted, and the
screen returns to the Inbox.
3
or
select.
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
1 Access the Text Message feature by performing
one of the following actions:
Radio Controls
Steps
Programmed
Text Message
button
Press the programmed Text
Message button.
Menu
1
2
to access the menu.
or
to Messages
and press
to select.
2
or
242
English
to Inbox and press
to select.
When you select Inbox and it contains no text
messages, the display shows List Empty, and
sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page
141).
to Delete All and press
to
4
or
to Yes and press
to select.
The display shows Inbox Cleared.
Privacy
If enabled, this feature helps to prevent
eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel
by the use of a software-based scrambling solution.
The signaling and user identification portions of a
transmission are not scrambled.
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current
channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled
transmission, although this is not a necessary
requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a
privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is
still able to receive clear (unscrambled)
transmissions.
Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission,
your radio must be programmed to have the same
1
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a
different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at
all (Enhanced Privacy).
2
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home
screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except
when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency
call or alarm.
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is
transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is
receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.
You can access this feature by performing one of the
following actions:
•
•
Pressing the programmed Privacy button to
toggle privacy on or off.
Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps
described next.
Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacy
feature. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the
transmitting radio.
to access the menu.
3
or
to Utilities and press
or
to Radio Settings or
Connect Plus and press
4
or
to select.
or
to
to select.
to Enhanced Privacy.
If the display shows Turn On, press
to
enable Privacy. The radio displays a message
confirming your selection.
If the display shows Turn Off, press
to
disable Privacy. The radio displays a message
confirming your selection.
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the
secure or unsecure icon appears on the status
bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving
an Emergency Alert.
243
English
Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy
button or by using the menu. Your radio must have
the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected
channel position to send a privacy-enabled
transmission. When privacy is enabled for the
currently selected channel position, all voice
transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled.
This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back
during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call,
and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same
Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to
unscramble the transmission.
Security
You can enable or disable any radio in the system.
For example, you might want to disable a stolen
radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable
that radio, when it is recovered.
Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited
to radios with these functions enabled. Check with
your dealer or system administrator for more
information.
244
English
Radio Disable
1 Access this feature by
Radio
Controls
Steps
Radio
Disable
button
1 Press the programmed Radio
Disable button.
2
or
to the required alias or
ID and press
Radio
menu
to select.
1
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and
2
press
to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 Use one of the steps described
next to select the required
subscriber alias or ID:
•
Select the required alias or ID
directly.
Radio
Controls
Steps
•
•
or
alias or ID and press
to select.
Use the Manual Dial menu
•
•
•
or
to Manual
Dial and press
to
select.
or
to Radio
Number and press
to
select.
The first line of the display
shows Radio Number:.
the second line of the
display shows a blinking
cursor. Use the keypad to
enter the subscriber alias
or ID and press
.
Steps
4
to the required
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Radio
Controls
or
to Radio Disable
and press
to select.
The display shows Radio Disable: <Target
Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green.
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
the display shows Radio Disable Successful.
If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds
and the display shows Radio Disable Failed.
Radio Enable
1 Access this feature by
Radio
Controls
Steps
Radio
Enable
button
1 Press the programmed Radio
Enable button.
245
English
Radio
Controls
Radio
Controls
Steps
2
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
to the required alias or
ID and press
Radio
menu
Steps
•
to access the menu.
or
to Contacts and press
•
select the required alias or ID
directly
•
•
English
or
to the required
alias or ID and press
to select.
use the Manual Dial menu
Number and press
to
select.
The first line of the display
shows Radio Number: .
the second line of the
display shows a blinking
cursor. Use the keypad to
enter the subscriber alias
•
to select. The entries are
alphabetically sorted.
3 Use one of the steps described
next to select the required
subscriber alias or ID
4
to Manual Dial
and press
to select.
or
to Radio
to select.
1
2
246
or
.
or ID and press
or
to Radio Enable and
press
to select.
The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber
Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.
If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and
the display shows Radio Enable Successful.
If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds
and the display shows Radio Enable Failed.
Password Lock Features
If enabled, this feature only allows you access your
radio if the correct password is entered upon
powering up.
Accessing the Radio from Password
1 Power up the radio.
The radio sounds a continuous tone.
2 Do one of the following:
•
•
Enter your current four-digit password with the
. Press
radio’s keypad. The display shows
to proceed.
Enter your current four-digit password. Press
or
to edit each digit’s numeric value.
Each digit changes to . Press
next digit. Press
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2 Wait for acknowledgement.
to move to
to confirm your selection.
You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit
entered. Press to remove each on the
display. The radio sounds a negative indicator
tone, if you press when the line is empty, or if
you press more than four digits.
If the password is correct, the radio proceeds to
power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page
24.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2.
After the third incorrect password, the display
shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio
Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks
yellow.
Note: The radio is unable to receive any call,
including emergency calls, in locked state.
247
English
Turning the Password Lock On or Off
7 If the password entered in the previous step is
1
correct, press
lock.
to access the menu.
2
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
to Utilities and press
The display shows
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Passwd Lock and press
to
4
to
The
to enable/disable password
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Unlocking the Radio from Locked State
1 If your radio was powered down after being in the
locked state, power up the radio.
A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.
The display shows Radio Locked.
5 Enter the four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 247.
2 Wait for 15 minutes.
Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked
state when you power up.
6
3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio from
Password on page 247.
Press
to proceed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the
previous menu.
248
English
Changing the Password
1
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 247.
2
9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit
password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio
from Password on page 247.
10
4
or
select.
to Passwd Lock and press
to
5 Enter the four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password
on page 247.
6
Press
to proceed.
If the password is incorrect, the display shows
Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the
previous menu.
7 If the password entered in the previous step is
correct,
to select.
or
to Change Pwd and press
8 Enter a new four-digit password.
Press
to proceed.
If the reentered password matches the new
password entered earlier, the display shows
Password Changed.
If the reentered password does NOT match the
new password entered earlier, the display shows
Passwords Do Not Match.
The screen automatically returns to the previous
menu.
Bluetooth Operation
Note: If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related
features are disabled and the Bluetooth device
database is erased.
This feature allows you to use your radio with a
Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless
249
English
Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both
Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-TheShelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32
feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path
between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled
device.
It is not recommended that you leave your radio
behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to
work with a high degree of reliability when they are
separated.
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone
quality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. To
correct this problem, simply position your radio and
Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within
the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish
clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function
has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10meter/32 feet range.
250
Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous
Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled
devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and
a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with
Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not
supported.
English
Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s
user manual for more details on your Bluetoothenabled device’s full capabilities.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Bluetooth and press
to select.
3
or
to My Status and press
to select.
The display shows On and Off. The current status
is indicated by a .
4 Do one of the following:
•
or
to On and press
to select. The
display shows On and a appears left of the
selected status.
•
or
to Off and press
to select. The
display shows Off and a appears left of the
selected status.
•
Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or
press
during the finding and connecting
operation as this cancels the operation.
1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place
it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetoothenabled device’s user manual.
2
On your radio, press
to access the menu.
3
or
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
to select.
4
to select.
5 Do one of the following:
•
or
to the required device and press
or
devices.
to Find Devices to locate available
or
to the required device and
press
to select.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device
6
to select.
or
to Connect and press
Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your
Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional
steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective
Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.
If successful, the radio display shows
<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appears
besides the connected device. The Bluetooth
Connected icon appears on the status bar.
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting
Failed.
Note: If pin code is required, use the same entry
method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from
Password on page 247.
to select.
251
English
Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode)
Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the
finding and connecting operation as this may cancel
the operation.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
1 Turn Bluetooth On.
See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 134.
Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device
1
On your radio, press
2
to select.
to Devices and press
to select.
5
4
or
to Find Me and press
to select.
Your radio can now be found by other Bluetoothenabled devices for a programmed duration. This
is called Discoverable Mode.
5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it
with your radio.
Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s
user manual.
English
or
to select.
or
to the required device and press
to select.
3
252
to Bluetooth and press
4
to access the menu.
to Bluetooth and press
or
3
2
or
to access the menu.
or
to Disconnect and press
to
select.
Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require
additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective
Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.
The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A
positive indicator tone sounds and disappears
beside the connected device. The Bluetooth
Connected icon disappears on the status bar.
You can toggle audio routing between internal radio
speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
•
•
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker
and Bluetooth Device
5
or
select.
to View Details and press
to
Editing Device Name
Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch
button.
You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled
devices.
A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio
to Radio.
A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio
to Bluetooth.
1
to access the menu.
2
Viewing Device Details
or
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
to select.
3
1
to access the menu.
to select.
4
2
or
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
or
to the required device and press
to select.
to select.
3
to select.
4
or
to the required device and press
to select.
5
or
6
Press
to Edit Name and press
to select.
to move one space to the left. Press
move one space to the right. Press
to
to delete
253
English
any unwanted characters. Long press
to
change text entry method.
A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type
the required zone.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
7 The display shows Device Name Saved.
The display shows Device Deleted.
Bluetooth Mic Gain
Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled
device’s microphone gain value.
1
to access the menu.
Deleting Device Name
You can remove a disconnected device from the list
of Bluetooth-enabled devices.
2
1
3
or
to access the menu.
2
or
to Bluetooth and press
or
to Devices and press
to select.
4
3
to select.
4
or
to the required device and press
to select.
5
254
English
or
to Delete and press
to select.
to Bluetooth and press
or
select.
to BT Mic Gain and press
or
values.
to the BT Mic Gain type and the current
To edit values, press
5
to select.
or
press
to
to select.
to increase or to decrease values and
to select.
Note: The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode
can only be enabled in MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled,
the Bluetooth item will not be displayed in the Menu
and you will not be able to use any Bluetooth
programmable button features.
Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your
radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. It
enables dedicated devices to use your radio position
in the process of Bluetooth-based location.
Accessing the Notification List
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode
1
to access the menu.
2
or
select.
to Notification and press
or
select.
to the required event and press
to
3
to
Notification List
Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your
“unread” events on the channel, such as unread text
messages, missed calls, and call alerts.
The Notification icon appears on the status bar when
the Notification List has one or more events.
The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread
events. When it is full, the next event automatically
replaces the oldest event.
Note: After the events are read, they are removed
from the Notification List.
Long press
to return to the Home Screen.
Utilities
Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if
needed.
Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to
toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure
described next to access this feature via the radio
menu.
255
English
1
1
to access the menu.
to access the menu.
2
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
3
or
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
or
select.
to Keypad Tones and press
to
4
to
5
5
or
to All Tones and press
to select.
6
Press
to enable/disable all tones and alerts.
The display shows
The
You can also use
option.
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.
English
to select.
3
or
select.
4
256
to Utilities and press
or
to change the selected
6
Press
to enable/disable keypad tones.
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
7 Do one of the following:
You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if
needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/
alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice
volume.
•
Press
to keep the required displayed
volume value.
•
Press
to exit without changing the current
volume offset settings.
1
to access the menu.
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
or
select.
to Vol. Offset and press
to
You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if
needed.
1
to access the menu.
4
2
to
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
5
6
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level
to
or
to the required volume value.
The radio sounds a feedback tone with each
corresponding volume value.
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
4
to
257
English
3
5
or
select.
to Talk Permit and press
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
to enable/disable the Talk Permit
to Power Up and press
You can also use
option.
disappears from beside Enabled.
to
or
to select.
to change the selected
6
You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone
if needed.
1
Press
Tone.
to enable/disable the Power Up Alert
The display shows
The
to access the menu.
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Setting the Power Level
2
or
English
to Tones/Alerts and press
to
5
beside Enabled.
Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off
258
or
select.
or
The display shows
The
to Radio Settings and press
4
6
Press
Tone.
or
select.
to Utilities and press
to select.
You can customize your radio’s power setting to high
or low for each Connect Plus zone.
High enables communication with tower sites in
Connect Plus mode located at a considerable
Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle
transmit power level between high and low. Follow
the procedure described next to access this feature
via the radio’s menus.
Screen returns to the previous menu.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
distance from you. Low enables communication with
tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity.
Changing the Display Mode
You can change radio’s display mode between Day
or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of
the display.
1
1
to access the menu.
to access the menu.
2
2
or
to Utilities and press
or
to select.
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
4
or
to Power and press
or
to Display and press
to select.
The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.
to select.
5
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
appears beside selected setting. At any time,
long press
to return to the Home screen.
Note:
or
to change the selected option.
5
or
to the required setting and press
to enable. appears besides selected setting.
259
English
Adjusting the Display Brightness
Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press
your entry.
You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.
Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when
“Auto Brightness” is enabled.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
to access the menu.
2
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
to Display and press
Setting the Display Backlight Timer
You can set the the radio’s display backlight timer as
needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation
Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly.
1
or
to select.
Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the
backlight settings, or follow the procedure described
next to access this feature via the radio menu.
The display backlight and keypad backlighting are
automatically turned off if the LED indicator is
disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on
page 151).
1
to access the menu.
5
or
to Brightness and press
select.
The display shows a progress bar.
6
260
English
to confirm
to
Decrease display brightness by pressing
increase the display brightness by pressing
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
.
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
4
5
or
to Display and press
to select.
or
select.
5
or
select.
to Backlight Timer and press
You can use
option.
or
to
to Intro Screen and press
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
6
to change the selected
Press
Screen.
Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if
needed.
to enable/disable the Introduction
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Locking and Unlocking the Keypad
1
to access the menu.
You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertent
key entry.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.
Option
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
Steps
Locking the 1
Keypad
to access the menu.
4
or
to Display and press
to select.
261
English
Option
Language
Steps
2
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
press
3
or
to Utilities and
to select.
to Radio Settings
1
and press
to select.
4
or
to Keypad Lock and
2
press
Press
followed by
or
select.
to Utilities and press
to select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
.
After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows
Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home
screen.
English
or
or
After the keypad is locked, the display shows
Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.
262
to access the menu.
3
to select.
You can also use or to change
the selected option.
Unlocking
the Keypad
You can set your radio display to be in your required
language.
to Languages and press
You can also use
option.
5
or
or
to select.
to change selected
to the required language and press
to enable.
language.
appears beside selected
Identifying Cable Type
You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if
needed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Turning the LED Indicator On or Off
You can select the type of cable your radio uses.
1
1
to access the menu.
to access the menu.
2
2
or
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to LED Indicator and press
to
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Cable Type and press
to
to enable/disable the LED Indicator.
The display shows
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
5 The current cable type is indicated by a .
5
The
or
select.
4
4
Press
to select.
3
3
or
select.
to Utilities and press
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
Voice Announcement
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the
current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,
or programmable button press. This audio indicator
can be customized per customer requirements. This
263
English
is typically useful when the user is in a difficult
condition to read the content shown on the display.
•
to disable Voice Announcement.
Press
The disappears from beside Enabled.
1
to access the menu.
Menu Timer
2
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu
before it automatically switches to the Home screen.
1
3
or
select.
4
or
to Radio Settings and press
to access the menu.
to
2
or
to Voice Announcement and press
or
or
select.
to change the selected
to
or
to Display and press
to select.
5
•
Press
to enable Voice Announcement.
The display shows beside Enabled.
English
to Radio Settings and press
4
5 Do one of the following:
264
to select.
3
to select.
You can also use
option.
to Utilities and press
or
select.
to Menu Timer and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
6
5 Do one of the following:
or
to the required setting and press
to select.
•
Press
shows
Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It
suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a
preset value in order to provide a consistent level of
audio.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
•
Press
to disable Mic AGC-D. The
disappears from beside Enabled.
Intelligent Audio
Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume
to overcome background noise in the environment,
inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise
sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and
does not affect Transmit audio.
Note: This feature is not applicable during a
Bluetooth session.
1
to access the menu.
You can also use
option.
or
to change the selected
4
or
to enable Mic AGC-D. The display
beside Enabled.
to Mic AGC-D and press
to select.
Radio
Control
Steps
Menu
1
to access the menu.
265
English
Radio
Control
or
2
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2
Steps
or
to Radio Settings and
press
3
or
to select.
to Radio Settings and
press
4
or
to select.
to Intelligent Audio
and press
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
4
or
to Intelligent Audio and press
to select.
Press
to enable Intelligent Audio. The
display shows beside Enabled.
to
Press
to enable Intelligent
Audio. The display shows
beside Enabled.
•
to disable Intelligent
Press
Audio. The disappears from
beside Enabled.
English
3
•
•
266
to select.
5 Do one of the following:
to select.
Note: You can also use or
change the selected option.
5 Do one of the following:
to Utilities and press
•
to disable Intelligent Audio. The
Press
disappears from beside Enabled.
See Authorized Accessories List on page 287 for
recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories
with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar
performance.
•
to disable Acoustic Feedback
Press
Suppressor. The disappears from beside
Enabled.
This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback
in received calls.
Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control
Feature On or Off
1
to access the menu.
2
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On
or Off
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to AF Suppressor and press
to
This feature allows you to enable the radio to
automatically monitor the microphone input and
adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio
clipping.
1
to access the menu.
4
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
5 Do one of the following.
•
Press
to enable Acoustic Feedback
Suppressor. The display shows beside
Enabled.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
267
English
4
3
or
select.
to Mic Distortion and press
to
5 Do one of the following:
or
select.
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Press
to enable Microphone Dynamic
Distortion Control. The display shows beside
Enabled.
to disable Microphone Dynamic
Press
Distortion Control. The disappears from
beside Enabled.
Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On or Off
GPS is a satellite navigation system that determines
the radio’s precise location. Press the programmed
GPS button to toggle the feature on or off.
to access the menu.
2
English
to Utilities and press
to select.
to select.
to enable/disable GPS.
Press
The display shows
The
beside Enabled.
disappears from beside Enabled.
See Checking the GPS Information on page 172 for
details on retrieving GPS information.
Text Entry Configuration
You can configure the following settings for entering
text on your radio:
•
•
•
•
1
to GPS and press
5
•
or
to
4
•
268
to Radio Settings and press
Word Predict
Word Correct
Sentence Cap
My Words
Your radio supports the following text entry methods:
•
Numbers
Symbols
Predictive or Multi-Tap
Language (If programmed)
Note: Press
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
•
•
•
4
at any time to return to the previous
to Text Entry and press
or
select.
to Word Predict and press
to
5
screen or long press
to return to the Home
Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the
inactivity timer expires.
Word Predict
or
select.
You can also use
option.
or
to
to change the selected
6 Do one of the following:
Your radio can learn common word sequences that
you often enter. It then predicts the next word you
may want to use after you enter the first word of a
common word sequence into the text editor.
•
Press
shows
to enable Word Predict. The display
beside Enabled.
•
to disable Word Predict. The
Press
disappears from beside Enabled.
1
to access the menu.
Sentence Cap
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter
in the first word for every new sentence.
1
to access the menu.
269
English
Viewing Custom Words
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
You can add your own custom words into your radio’s
in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to
contain these words.
1
to access the menu.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
4
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
or
select.
to Sentence Cap and press
to
2
or
5
6 Do one of the following:
to
•
to disable Sentence Cap. The
Press
disappears from beside Enabled.
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
5
or
to My Words and press
to select.
6
or
to List of Words and press
select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
270
English
to
4
•
to enable Sentence Cap. The
Press
display shows beside Enabled.
to Utilities and press
to
7
or
select.
You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.
1
or
2
to Utilities and press
to select.
to Radio Settings and press
to
to Edit and press
to Text Entry and press
the
method. Press
completed.
5
or
to My Words and press
to select.
6
or
to List of Words and press
select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
to
or
key to move one space to the right.
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
to
to select.
to move one space to the left. Press
Press the
4
or
select.
to
9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
Press
3
or
select.
to the required word and press
8
to access the menu.
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Editing Custom Word
to change text entry
once your custom word is
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming
your custom word is being saved.
If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
271
English
Adding Custom Word
Press
You can add your own custom words into your radio’s
in-built dictionary.
Press the
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and press
method. Press
completed.
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
to change text entry
once your custom word is
The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming
your custom word is being saved.
If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
4
to
If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice.
5
Deleting a Custom Word
or
to My Words and press
to select.
6
or
to Add New Word and press
select.
Display shows the list of custom words.
7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.
English
key to delete any unwanted
characters. Long press
2
or
key to move one space to the right.
the
1
272
to move one space to the left. Press
to
You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
4
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Deleting All Custom Words
3
You can delete all custom words from your radio’s inbuilt.
1
to
to access the menu.
2
5
or
to My Words and press
or
to select.
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
6
or
select.
to the required word and press
to
or
select.
to Radio Settings and press
or
select.
to Text Entry and press
to
4
7
or
to Delete and press
to select.
8 Choose one of the following.
5
or
•
to select Yes.
At Delete Entry?, press
The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
or
to No and press
previous screen.
to
to return to the
to My Words and press
to select.
6
or
select.
to Delete All and press
to
7 Choose one of the following.
273
English
•
Accessing the Battery Information
to select Yes.
At Delete Entry?, press
The display shows Entry Deleted.
•
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
to No and press
previous screen.
to return to the
Accessing General Radio Information
Your radio contains information on the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Battery
Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)
Radio Model Number Index
Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC
Site Number
Site Info
Radio Alias and ID
Firmware and Codeplug Versions
GPS Information
Press
274
at any time to return to the previous
screen or long press
to return to the Home
screen. The radio exits the current screen once the
inactivity timer expires.
English
Displays information on your radio battery.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
or
select.
to Battery Info and press
to
4
to
The display shows the battery information.
For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads
Recondition Battery if the battery requires
reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the
reconditioning process, the display then shows the
battery information.
3
or
select.
Note: The measurement on the display shows the
degree of tilt at the moment you press
to accept
the Accelerometer option. If you change the angle
of the radio after pressing
, the radio does not
change the measurement shown on its display. It
continues to display the measurement taken when
was pressed.
If the portable radio has been enabled for the Man
Down Alarms, there is a menu option to check how
the radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpful
feature when the dealer or Radio System
Administrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect Plus
Option Board CPS programming software to
configure the activation angle that will trigger the tilt
alarm.
to access the menu.
2
to Utilities and press
to Radio Info and press
to
4 Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the Tilt
Alarm.
5
or
to Accelerometer and press
to
select.
The display shows the radio’s angle of tilt
(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) in
degrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, use
MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS to
configure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees
(which is the closest programmable value). The
Tilt Alarm timers are triggered when the Activation
Angle is 60 degrees, or greater.
Checking the Radio Model Number Index
This index number identifies your radio’s modelspecific hardware. Your radio system administrator
may ask for this number when preparing a new
Option Board codeplug for your radio.
1
or
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)
to select.
275
English
1
2
to access the menu.
or
2
to Utilities and press
to select.
or
select.
3
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
Follow the instructions below if your radio system
administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA
Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This
menu option only appears if the Option Board
received its last codeplug update OTA.
Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)
Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, the
display shows Not Registered.
The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with
a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio
does not generally indicate the Site number. To
display the registered Site number, do the following:
1
1
to access the menu.
to
or
to OB OTA CPcrc and press
to
select.
The display shows some letters and numbers.
Communicate this information to your radio
system administrator exactly as shown.
or
to Model Index and press
to
select.
The display shows the Model Number Index.
Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA
Codeplug File
to Radio Info and press
4
4
English
to select.
3
or
276
to Utilities and press
to access the menu.
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
If you are requested to use this feature, please report
the displayed information exactly as it appears on the
screen.
1
to access the menu.
2
4
or
to Site Number and press
to
select.
The display shows the Network ID and the Site
Number.
Checking the Site Info
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, the
display shows Not Registered.
or
to Site Info and press
The display shows the Site Info.
to select.
The Site Info feature provides information that can be
useful to a service technician. It consists of the
following information:
Checking the Radio ID
•
Follow the procedure described next to access this
feature via the radio screen.
•
•
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
2
Repeater number of current Control Channel
repeater.
RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from
Control Channel repeater.
Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater
(five numbers separated by commas).
This feature displays the ID of your radio.
1
to access the menu.
277
English
The display a list with the following information:
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
4
or
to My ID and press
The display shows the radio ID.
to select.
Displays the firmware version on your radio.
to access the menu.
2
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
278
English
or
to Versions and press
Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain
files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency
File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air.
Note: Check with the dealer or network administrator
to determine whether this feature has been enabled
for your radio.
1
to Utilities and press
(Radio) Firmware Version
(Radio) Codeplug Version
Option Board Firmware Version
Option Board Frequency Version
Option Board Hardware Version
Option Board Codeplug Version
Checking for Updates
Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version
or
•
•
•
•
•
•
to select.
Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to
show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC,
Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file
version via a menu option. In addition, display radios
that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer
can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending
file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file
that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system
messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of
only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board
Firmware File:
•
•
•
•
See the version number of the pending file.
See what percentage of packets has been
collected so far.
Request the Connect Plus radio to resume
collecting file packets.
If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air
file transfer, there may be times when the radio
automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying
the radio user. While the radio is collecting file
packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio
displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home
Screen status bar.
Note: The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file
packets and receive calls at the same time. If you
wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the
PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on
the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the
file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at
a later time.
There are several things that can make the file
transfer process start again. The first example applies
to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply
•
•
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
the file’s packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has
a pending file, the menu provides options to:
The radio system administrator re-initiates the
over-the-air file transfer.
The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires,
which causes the Option Board to automatically
resume the process of collecting packets.
The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user
requests the file transfer to resume via the menu
option.
After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all
file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired
file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an
automatic process and does not require a radio reset.
For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an
automatic process that will cause a brief interruption
to service as the Option Board loads the new
codeplug information and re-acquires a network site.
How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option
Board firmware file depends on how the radio has
been configured by the dealer or system
administrator. The radio will either upgrade
immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will
wait until the next time that the user turns the radio
on.
279
English
Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator
to determine how your radio has been programmed.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
The process of upgrading to a new Option Board
firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires
the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio.
Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be
able to make or receive calls until the process is
completed.
4
or
or
to Firmware and press
to select.
The display shows Firmware is Up to Date.
Pending Firmware – Version
1
Note: If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to
Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more
recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio
displays a list with additional options; Version,
%Received, and Download.
2
to access the menu.
or
or
select.
2
to select.
280
English
to Radio Info and press
to
to
or
to Updates and press
or
to Firmware and press
or
to Version and press
to select.
5
3
to Radio Info and press
to select.
4
to access the menu.
or
select.
to Utilities and press
3
1
to Utilities and press
to select.
5
Firmware File
Firmware Up to Date
or
to Updates and press
to select.
6
to select.
Note: When at 100%, the radio needs to be power
cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware
upgrade.
If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,
the display shows Firmware is Up to Date.
Pending Firmware – % Received
Pending Firmware – Download
1
If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA
Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial
file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if
still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you
want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board
Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this
internal timer, use the Download option as described
below.
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
The screen displays the percentage of firmware
file packets collected so far.
If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,
the display shows the pending firmware version
number.
1
to access the menu.
4
or
to Updates and press
or
to Firmware and press
or
to %Received and press
to select.
2
or
5
to select.
6
to select.
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
281
English
4
or
to Updates and press
to select.
5
or
to Firmware and press
to select.
or
to Download and press
The display shows the following:
to select.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
6
Download Available
Start Download
No Download
Available
Download not
available
Frequency File
Frequency File Up to Date
Note: If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if
the radio has partially collected a more recent
frequency file version) the radio displays a list with
additional options; Version, %Received, and
Download.
1
to access the menu.
2
or
or
select.
•
to start the
to Radio Info and press
or
to Frequency and press
to select.
The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.
to return to the
Frequency File Pending – Version
1
to access the menu.
282
English
to
4
•
Select No and press
previous menu.
to select.
3
7 Do one of the following:
Select Yes and press
download.
to Utilities and press
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
3
2
or
to Utilities and press
or
select.
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
to Updates and press
to select.
5
4
or
to Updates and press
or
to Frequency and press
or
to %Received and press
to select.
The screen displays the percentage of frequency
file packets collected so far.
to select.
5
to select.
Frequency File Pending – Download
6
or
to Version and press
to select.
If there is a pending Frequency File, the display
shows the pending Frequency File version
number.
Frequency File Pending – % Received
1
1
to access the menu.
to access the menu.
2
or
to Utilities and press
If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA
Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file,
the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still
ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want
the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File
transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use
the Download option as described below.
to select.
2
or
to Utilities and press
to select.
283
English
Checking the GPS Information
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
to Updates and press
or
to Frequency and press
or
to Download and press
to select.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
5
to select.
6
to select.
Download Currently
Unavailable
Download not
available
Download Currently
Available
Start Download
Displays the GPS information on your radio, such as
values of:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
to access the menu.
2
or
7 Do one of the following:
•
•
Select Yes and press to start the download.
Select No and press to return to the previous
menu.
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Direction
Velocity
Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
Satellites
Version
to Utilities and press
to select.
3
or
select.
to Radio Info and press
to
4
or
284
English
to GPS Info and press
to select.
Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode
5
or
to the required item and press
select.
The display shows the requested GPS
information.
to
See Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On
or Off on page 161 for details on GPS.
285
English
Accessories
Accessories
286
English
Antennas
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5
6
UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Whip Antenna
(PMAE4068_)[5]
UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Slim Whip Antenna
(PMAE4079_)[5]
UHF, 403 – 450MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAE4069_)[5]
UHF, 440 – 490MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAE4070_[5]
UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAE4071_)[5]
UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAE4071_)[5]
VHF, 144 – 165MHz, Helical Antenna
(PMAD4116_)[5]
VHF, 136 – 155MHz, Helical Antenna
(PMAD4117_)[5]
VHF, 152 – 174MHz, Helical Antenna
(PMAD4118_)[5]
Applicable to XPR7550 only.
Applicable to XPR7580 only.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VHF, 136 – 148MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAD4119_)[5]
VHF, 146 – 160MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAD4120_)[5]
VHF, 160 – 174MHz, Stubby Antenna
(PMAD4121)[5]
800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Whip Antenna
(PMAF4011_)[6]
800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Whip Antenna
(PMAF4012_)[6]
800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Short Whip Antenna
(PMAF4009_)
800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Short Whip Antenna
(PMAF4010_)
Authorized Accessories List
Authorized Accessories List
Batteries
•
•
Core NiMH, 1300 mAh Battery (PMNN4412_)[7]
Core Slim Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Battery
(PMNN4406_R)
287
English
•
•
•
•
IMPRES Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Slim Battery
(PMNN4407_R)
IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2150 mAh Battery
(PMNN4409_R)
IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2300 mAh Battery
(FM) (NNTN8129_)
IMPRES Li-Ion, 2700 mAh Battery
(PMNN4448_R)
Carry Devices
Authorized Accessories List
•
•
•
•
•
288
7
2.5-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop
(PMLN5610_)
3-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop
(PMLN5611_)
Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt
Loop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5838_)
Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Swivel Belt
Loop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5840_)
Hard Leather Carry Case with 2.5-Inch Swivel Belt
Loop for Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio
(PMLN5842_)
Applicable to XPR7550 only.
English
•
•
•
Nylon Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt Loop for
Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio
(PMLN5844_)
Belt Clip for 2-Inch Belt Width (PMLN4651_)
Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width (PMLN7008_)
Chargers
•
•
•
•
•
•
IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger (WPLN4212_)
IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display
(WPLN4219_)
IMPRES Single-Unit Charger (WPLN4232_)
Core Single Unit Charger (NNTN8117_)
IMPRES Vehicular Charger (NNTN7616_)
IMPRES Battery Reader (NNTN7392_)
Earbuds and Earpieces
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive-Only Earbud (AARLN4885_)
Receive-Only Earbud (MDRLN4885)
D-Shell Receive-Only Earpiece (PMLN4620_)
Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4941_)
Standard Earpiece, Black (RLN6279_)
Standard Earpiece, Beige (RLN6280_)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Beige
(RLN6284_)
Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Black
(RLN6285_)
Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Beige (RLN6288_)
Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Black (RLN6289_)
1-Wire Earbud, 29cm Cord, Black (NNTN8294_)
1-Wire Earbud,116cm Cord, Black (NNTN8295_)
Over-the-Ear Receiver for Remote Speaker
Microphone (WADN4190_)
D-Shell Earset (PMLN5096_)
IMPRES Temple Transducer with In-line Push-toTalk (PMLN5101_)
Replacement Foam Ear Pad and Windscreen
(RLN6283_)
Replacement Ear Seal Cloth Cover (1580376E32)
Replacement Boom Mic Windscreen
(5080548E02)
Replacement Windscreen O-Ring (3280376E35)
Wireless Earpiece Maintenance Kit (NTN8821_)
Replacement Ear Tips Kit for Wireless Ear Buds
(NNTN8316_)
Replacement Ear Tubes for CommPort Earpiece,
Pack of 10 (RLN5037_)
•
Ear Straps for CommPort Earpiece (for Secure
Attachment to Ear), Pack of 10 (NTN8988_)
Authorized Accessories List
•
Headsets and Headset Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ultra-Lite Headset (PMLN5102_)
Heavy Duty Noise-Canceling Headset
(PMLN5275_)
Lightweight Headset (RMN5058_)
Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk
Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable
(NNTN8125_)
Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk
Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 9.5-Inch Cable
(NNTN8126_)
Non-Secure Wireless Push-to-Talk Device
(NNTN8127_)
Push-to-Talk Module, without Charger
(NNTN8191_)
Replacement Earpiece 12–Inch Cable (for
NNTN8125_)(NTN2572_)
Business Wireless Accessory Kit (PMLN6463_)
Remote Speaker Microphones
•
Remote Speaker Microphone (PMMN4024_)
289
English
•
•
•
•
•
Authorized Accessories List
•
•
•
IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone
(PMMN4025_)
Remote Speaker Microphone, Submersible (IP57)
(PMMN4040_)
IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with
Volume, IP57 (PMMN4046_)
IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with
Earjack, Noise-Canceling (PMMN4050_)
Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement Coil
Cord Kit (For Use with PMMN4024_ and
PMMN4040_) (RLN6074_)
Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement Coil
Cord Kit (For Use with PMMN4025_,
PMMN4046_, PMMN4050_) (RLN6075_)
IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, IP57
(NNTN8382_)
IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with
Earjack (NNTN8383_)
Surveillance Accessories
•
•
290
•
English
Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Black (Single Wire)
(PMLN6125_)
Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Beige (Single Wire)
(PMLN6126_)
Surveillance Low Noise Kit (RLN5886_)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surveillance High Noise Kit (RLN5887_)
IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Black
(PMLN6127_)
IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Beige
(PMLN6128_)
IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,
Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (RLN5882_)
IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,
Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6129_)
IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,
Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige(PMLN6130_)
IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Black (PMLN5097_)
IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Beige (PMLN5106_)
IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,
Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6123_)
IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,
Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6124_)
Transparent Acoustic Tube (RLN6242_)
Replacement Foam Plugs, Pack of 50 (For Use
with RLN5886_) (RLN6281_)
Replacement Ear Tips, Clear, Pack of 50 (For Use
with RLN5887_) (RLN6282_)
Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Right
Ear (RLN4760_)
•
•
•
•
Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,
Right Ear (RLN4761_)
Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,
Right Ear (RLN4762_)
Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left
Ear (RLN4763_)
Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,
Left Ear (RLN4764_)
Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left
Ear (RLN4765_)
•
Belt (4200865599)
Authorized Accessories List
•
Miscellaneous Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Universal Chest Pack (HLN6602_)
Waterproof Bag, Includes Large Carry Strap
(HLN9985_)
Shoulder Strap (Attaches to D-Ring on Carry
Case) (NTN5243_)
Small Clip, Epaulet Strap (RLN4295_)
Break-A-Way Chest Pack (RLN4570_)
Universal RadioPAK and Utility Case (Fanny
Pack) (RLN4815_)
Replacement Strap for RLN4570_ and HLN6602_
Chest Packs (1505596Z02)
Universal RadioPAK Extension Belt (4280384F89)
291
English
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Frequency Range
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range
Special Channel Assignments
5
6
7
Emergency Channel
If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and
require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16
to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the
United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following
information, in this order:
1 “MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.”
2 “THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN
__________.” State the name of the vessel in
distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other
identification of the vessel, stated 3 times.
3 Repeat “MAYDAY” and the name of the vessel.
4 “WE ARE LOCATED AT
_______________________.” State the position
of the vessel in distress, using any information that
will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
•
•
292
English
latitude and longitude
bearing (state whether you are using true or
magnetic north)
8
9
10
11
• distance to a well-known landmark
• vessel course, speed or destination
State the nature of the distress.
Specify what kind of assistance you need.
State the number of persons on board and the
number needing medical attention, if any.
Mention any other information that would be
helpful to responders, such as type of vessel,
vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc.
“OVER.”
Wait for a response.
If you do not receive an immediate response,
remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at
intervals until you receive a response. Be
prepared to follow any instructions given to you.
Non-Commercial Call Channel
For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing
reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling,
or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9.
Operating Frequency Requirements
A radio designated for shipboard use must comply
with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part
80 as follows:
on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the
Communications Act, the radio must be capable of
operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency.
on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the
radio must be capable of operating:
1
156.050
160.550
2
156.100
160.700
*
156.150
160.750
4
156.200
160.800
5
156.250
160.850
6
156.300
–
7
156.350
160.950
Note:
8
156.400
–
Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83
cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US
waters.
9
156.450
156.450
10
156.500
156.500
11
156.550
156.550
12
156.600
156.600
13**
156.650
156.650
14
156.700
156.700
15**
156.750
156.750
16
156.800
156.800
17**
156.850
156.850
•
•
in the simplex mode on the ship station
transmitting frequencies specified in the
156.025 – 157.425 MHz frequency band, and
in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency
channels specified in the table below.
•
Additional information about operating requirements
in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full
text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast
Guard.
Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List
Channel
Number
Frequency (MHz)
Transmit
Receive
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range
•
293
English
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range
294
English
18
156.900
161.500
66
156.325
160.925
19
156.950
161.550
67**
156.375
156.375
20
157.000
161.600
68
156.425
156.425
*
157.050
161.650
69
156.475
156.475
22
157.100
161.700
71
156.575
156.575
*
157.150
161.750
72
156.625
–
24
157.200
161.800
73
156.675
156.675
25
157.250
161.850
74
156.725
156.725
26
157.300
161.950
75
***
***
27
157.350
161.950
76
***
***
28
157.400
162.000
77**
156.875
–
60
156.025
160.625
78
156.925
161.525
*
156.075
160.675
79
156.975
161.575
62
156.125
160.725
80
157.025
161.025
63
156.175
160.775
*
157.025
161.675
*
156.225
160.825
*
157.125
161.725
65
156.275
160.875
*
157.175
161.775
157.225
161.825
85
157.275
161.875
86
157.325
161.925
87
157.375
161.975
88
157.425
162.025
Note:
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83
cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US
waters.
** Low power (1 W) only.
Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range
84
Technical Parameters for Interfacing External
Data Sources
RS232
USB
SB9600
Input
Voltage
(Volts
Peak-topeak)
18V
3.6V
5V
Max Data
Rate
28 kb/s
12 Mb/s
9.6 kb/s
Impedance
5k ohm
90 ohm
120 ohm
*** Guard band.
Note: A – in the Receive column indicates that the
channel is transmit only.
Declaration of Compliance for the Use of
Distress and Safety Frequencies
The radio equipment does not employ a modulation
other than the internationally adopted modulation for
maritime use when it operates on the distress and
safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3.
295
English
Batteries and Chargers Warranty
The Workmanship Warranty
Batteries and Chargers Warranty
The workmanship warranty guarantees against
defects in workmanship under normal use and
service.
All MOTOTRBO
Batteries
24 Months
IMPRES Chargers
(Single-Unit and MultiUnit, Non-Display)
24 Months
IMPRES Chargers (MultiUnit with Display)
12 Months
The Capacity Warranty
The capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the rated
capacity for the warranty duration.
Nickel Metal-Hydride
(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Lilon) Batteries
296
English
12 Months
IMPRES Batteries, When
Used Exclusively with
IMPRES Chargers
18 Months
MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR
HOW LONG:
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“MOTOROLA”)
warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured
Communication Products listed below (“Product”)
against defects in material and workmanship under
normal use and service for a period of time from the
date of purchase as scheduled below:
XPR Series Digital
Portable Radios
24 Months
Product Accessories
(Excluding Batteries and
Chargers)
12 Months
MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either
repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts),
replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or
refund the purchase price of the Product during the
warranty period provided it is returned in accordance
with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or
boards are warranted for the balance of the original
applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of
Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA.
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty
This express limited warranty is extended by
MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only
and is not assignable or transferable to any other
party. This is the complete warranty for the Product
manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA
assumes no obligations or liability for additions or
modifications to this warranty unless made in writing
and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.
Unless made in a separate agreement between
MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser,
MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,
maintenance or service of the Product.
MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for
any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA
which is attached to or used in connection with the
Product, or for operation of the Product with any
ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is
expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each
system which may use the Product is unique,
MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or
297
English
operation of the system as a whole under this
warranty.
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:
Limited Warranty
This warranty sets forth the full extent of
MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product.
Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price,
at MOTOROLA’s option, is the exclusive remedy.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF
TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS,
LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE
FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY
LAW.
298
English
III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON
HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY.
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there
may be other rights which may vary from state to
state.
IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date
of purchase and Product item serial number) in order
to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send
the Product item, transportation and insurance
prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.
Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA
through one of its authorized warranty service
locations. If you first contact the company which sold
you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication
service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining
warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at
1-800-927-2744 US/Canada.
1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the
Product in other than its normal and customary
manner.
2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water,
or neglect.
3 Defects or damage from improper testing,
operation, maintenance, installation, alteration,
modification, or adjustment.
4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused
directly by defects in material workmanship.
5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product
modifications, disassembles or repairs (including,
without limitation, the addition to the Product of
non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which
adversely affect performance of the Product or
interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty
inspection and testing of the Product to verify any
warranty claim.
6 Product which has had the serial number removed
or made illegible.
7 Rechargeable batteries if:
8
9
10
11
any of the seals on the battery enclosure of
cells are broken or show evidence of
tampering.
• the damage or defect is caused by charging or
using the battery in equipment or service other
than the Product for which it is specified.
Freight costs to the repair depot.
A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized
alteration of the software/firmware in the Product,
does not function in accordance with
MOTOROLA’s published specifications or the FCC
certification labeling in effect for the Product at the
time the Product was initially distributed from
MOTOROLA.
Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product
surfaces that does not affect the operation of the
Product.
Normal and customary wear and tear.
Limited Warranty
•
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT
COVER:
VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit
brought against the end user purchaser to the extent
that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts
infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will
pay those costs and damages finally awarded against
299
English
the end user purchaser in any such suit which are
attributable to any such claim, but such defense and
payments are conditioned on the following:
Limited Warranty
1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in
writing by such purchaser of any notice of such
claim,
2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the
defense of such suit and all negotiations for its
settlement or compromise, and
3 should the Product or parts become, or in
MOTOROLA’s opinion be likely to become, the
subject of a claim of infringement of a United
States patent, that such purchaser will permit
MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to
procure for such purchaser the right to continue
using the Product or parts or to replace or modify
the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to
grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or
parts as depreciated and accept its return. The
depreciation will be an equal amount per year over
the lifetime of the Product or parts as established
by MOTOROLA.
300
MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any
claim of patent infringement which is based upon the
combination of the Product or parts furnished
English
hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not
furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have
any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or
software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is
attached to or used in connection with the Product.
The foregoing states the entire liability of
MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents
by the Product or any parts thereof.
Laws in the United States and other countries
preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for
copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the
exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute
copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA
software may be used in only the Product in which
the software was originally embodied and such
software in such Product may not be replaced,
copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to
produce any derivative thereof. No other use
including, without limitation, alteration, modification,
reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of
such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in
such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is
granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under
MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.
Limited Warranty
VII. GOVERNING LAW:
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of
Illinois, U.S.A.
301
English
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
1303 East Algonquin Road
Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A.
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and
the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2012 – 2014 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
October 2014
www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo
*68009502001*
68009502001-HA